GIAO AN ANH 8

Work in pairs to do the exercise Read their answers aloud Copy down -Practice asking and answering the questions.. Copy the right answers.[r]

Preparing date: 17/8/2015 Teaching date : 18/8/2015 Period Consolidation I Objectives: *.Teaching points :Students will be able to remind something about grade and know how to learn well in the new school year II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: - Present simple tense - Present progressive tense - Adj : Compareative & superative III.Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalks , boards ,posters IV Procedures: * Organizations(2’) – Greeting and checking attendance * Checking up (7’) –Rewrite some main grammar structures in grade on the board - T asks some Ss to go to the board and rewrite - T corrects and give marks * New lesson : Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities I Revision : The tenses : - Present simple: S + V( s/es)/ To be (am/ is /are) - Present progressive : S + To Be + V_ ing +… - Simple future : S + Will/ Shall … - Near future : To Be going to… - Past simple: S + V( ed/ qkbqt)/To Be( was/ were) -Give some forms and uses -Listen and repeat the uses and forms of them -Copy down -work individually -Work in pairs to practice changing these sentences into other tenses *Teacher hang a poster, give some forms and uses => Ask Ss to repeat the uses and forms of each tense Exercise : Change these sentences into other tenses ( Present simple , Present progressive , near future , Simple future and Past simple ) and add appropriate adverbs of time She is in Grade => ………………………… They are playing soccer =>…………………… She went to Ha Noi last week =>…………… - Some pairs to demonstrate in front of class I will visit my sister next week =.>……………… Mai is going to build a new house =>…………… - Ask Ss to work in pairs - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class - Give feedback II Presenting the English Grade - There are 16 units in this program , each unit has parts Which mention a particular skill such as Listening Speaking , Reading and Writing + At the beginning of the unit is “ Getting started “ to lead in the new lesson or in order to warm up -Each unit has Language Focus which help Ss to summarize basic knowledge they have learnt in each one Introduce some books , reference books to students III Preparation : - Ask Ss to prepare Unit “ Getting started + Listen and read “ IV Consolidations :- Retell the main contents of this lesson V Homeworks : -Learn by heart these old forms - Redo all exercises in work books - Prepare for next lesson *Feed-back Listen to the introduction Work individually Listen and copy -Copy down homeworks Work individually Preparing date: 20/8/2015 Teaching date : 21/8/2015 Unit 1: My friends Period Lesson1 : Getting started - Listen & read I Objectives: * Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Hoa LAN _ Nine and read the dialogue for details and review simple present and simple past tenses II Language contents: Vocabulary: - Some of active words Grammar: - Asking about people’s appearance - Exclamations - Enough with adj III Teaching aids : Text books , cards , cassette , chalk ,poster IV; Procedures: * Organizations (2’) Greeting and checking attendance *Checking up (7’)- Asks Ss to retell tenses to learned in grade - T corrects and give marks * New lesson : Teacher’s activities Students,activities I Warm up : Pelmanism Work in groups meet come live think send thought receive met lived received came sent Listen and write down - Remark and lead in new lesson II Presentation : Pre- reading Listen and repeat in chorus a) Pre- teach vocabulary : Introduce the aims and some and individually new words Guess its meanings - to seem ( translation ) - a next door neighbor : a person who lives next to your Copy down house - to look like ( translation ) Play game in whole class * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember b) Pre- questions - Give Ss some questions and ask them to work in pairs Work in pairs to answer them Is Nien Lan,s friend or Hoa,s friend ? How old is Nien ? Where does Nien live ? Is she a beautiful girl ? - Give feedback While – reading : Listen carefully - Turn on the tape times and ask them to read the dialogue between Hoa , Lan and Nien Then check if their answers are correct or not *Answers: 1-She is Hoa,s friend Repeat all the correct answers 2- She is 12 years old /3- She lives in Hue and copy down 4- Yes , she is Comprehension questions - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and answer the questions in exercise / page 11 - Have them work in pairs to answer the questions - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class and correct their mistakes or pronunciation - Correct and give feedback : a) She lives in Hue b) No , she does not c) The sentence is “ She was not old enough to be in my class “ d) At Christmas - Ask them to work in open pairs to practice asking and answering the questions and the dialogue Gap filling : Language focus - Ask Ss to use the present simple and simple past tense to complete the paragraph , using some verbs : live – send – be – come Hoa in Hue last year , but now she in Ha Noi Yesterday , Hoa ,s friend Nien Hoa a letter Nien Hoa, neighbor when Hoa lived in Hue She younger than Hoa She to Ha Noi in December - Get Ss to work individually and then compare their answers with their partners - Give feedback lived – lives – sent – was – is - comes - Asks Ss exercise 1(16) - Call on some Ss to read the completed paragraph in front of class III Post - reading : Writing - Ask Ss to write a paragraph about Hoa and Lan - Give Ss some cues and ask them to use the simple present or past tense to write individually * Cues : a Lan / Hoa,s best friend b They / same class / Quang Trung School c Last year / Hoa / to school first time d Lan / show / round / introduce / to new friends - Let Ss discuss with their partners - Choose some answers and correct them in front of the class IV Consolidations: - Retell the main points of this lesson V Homeworks: Rewrite all the answers and complete paragraph on their notebooks / Do Exercise in workbook Prepare the next lesson *Feed-back Work in pairs Demonstrate in front of class Practice asking and answering the questions and the dialogue Complete the paragraph individually Read the complete paragraph aloud Write a paragraph about Hoa , Lan Demonstrate in front of class Listen and copy Preparing date: 21/8/2015 Teaching date : 22/8/2015 Unit : My friends Period Lesson : Speak & listen I Objectives: * Teaching points :- By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to describe someone -Develop Ss’ speaking skill II Language contents: Vocabulary : - Some of descripting words Grammar : - How to describe some one - The way introducing some body and rebling when being introduced III Teaching aids : Textbooks , pictures , chalks, lesson plan , radio, CD poster IV procedures: * Organizations (2’) Greeting and checking attendance * Checking up (7’) – Asks some ss to go to the board to describe about their friends - T corrects and give marks * New lesson :( 27’) Teacher’s activities Warm up :* Brainstorming : - Ask Ss to think of the adjectives used to describe body build and hair Students,activities - Ss work in groups of * Possible answers : - fat - straight - slim - long - tall - short - Color : black / dark - overweight blond / fair - slender brown/grey Presentation : - Show Ss a picture of Mary and ask them to describe her hair , her body build Ex : She has long blond hair She is short and thin Form S + have / has + adjective + hair S + be + adjectives Practice : Word cue drill - Prepare cards so that students can drill easily a He / tall / thin b She / short / slim c He / short / fat d Long / black e Curly / blond f Straight / brown - Ask Ss to read their complete sentences aloud - Correct and give feedback a He is tall and thin b She is short and slim c He is short and fat d She has long black hair e She has curly blond hair f She has straight brown hair Practice speaking - Ask Ss to look at six people in their books - Call on a student to describe one person , the others have to guess who he / she is * Example : S1 : This person is short and thin She has long blond hair S2 : Is this Mary ? - Yes - Go on until six people on the poster are described Work in group Read all the adjectives aloud Look at the picture and read the example aloud Copy and give some examples Work individually *Feed-back body build / hairs Preparing date: 24/8/2015 Teaching date : 25/8/2015 Unit 1: My friends Period Lesson : Read I objectives: *Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Ba,s friend - Develop Ss’ reading skill II Language contents: Vocabulary : - Character, orphanage, reserved, sociable , tell jorks, sense of humor Grammar : - Present simple tense III Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , board, lesson plan ,posters IV Procedures: *Organization : Greeting and checking attendance *Checking up :- In the new lesson and give them marks *New lesson: Teacher’s activities S’s activities Warm up : * Chatting Ask Ss to look at four pictures on page 10 and talk about the activities they want to after school or Work in groups in their free time and ask some questions : 1.What are these students doing ? (play soccer / play chess /read books /play volleyball ) What time of the day you think it is ? ( in the morning / evening , after school ) Do you like soccer / reading books ? Whom you like playing with ? - Correct mistakes if any and lead in the new lesson Pre - reading : Introduce the aims and some new Listen carefully words to students Pre- teach( vocabulary) : - a character ( translation ) Listen and repeat - an orphanage : a place where children without parents live Guess its meanings and copy - reserved (adj) - sociable (adj) - to tell jokes = to tell a story which makes people laugh - (a) sense of humor ( translation ) * Checking vocabulary : What and where Play games - Write the word on the board , put one word in each circle T/F statements predictions - Stick the poster of T / F statements are about Ba and his friends , read them and guess which statements are true , which are false : a Ba only has three friends – Bao , Song , Khai b Ba and his friends have the same characters c Bao – Song – Khai are quite reserved in public d They all enjoy school and study hard - Get Ss to work in pairs - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board While - reading - Ask Ss to open their books and read the text carefully and check their predictions : - Give feedback a F b F c F d T - Ask Ss to correct the false statements * Correction: a Ba has a lot of friends , but he spends most of his time with Bao , Song Khai b They have different characters c Only Song and Khai are quite reserved - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud * Choose the best answer and write : - Explain the meanings of the phrases : + does not affect his school work : kh«ng ¶nh hëng tíi viÖc häc + rather shy : h¬i nhót nh¸t + get tired of : nhµm ch¸n - Ask Ss to work in pairs to choose the best answers - Call on some pairs to report their answers - Listen and correct Then give feed back a A b C c B d D * Now answer the questions : - Let Ss read the text again and work in pairs - Call on some pairs of students to ask and answer the questions - Correct and give feedback a He feels lucky having a lot of friends b Bao is the most sociable c Khai likes reading d His jokes sometimes annoy his friends e Bao spends his free time doing volunteer work at local orphanage - Let Ss practice asking and answering the questions in open pairs * Post - reading : - Ask Ss to work in groups and talk to one another about their friends , using the adjectives they have just learnt to describe - Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class Work in pairs to predict Read their predictions Read the text and check their predictions Correct the false statements and copy Read the text aloud ( Ss ) Listen and copy down Work in pairs to the exercise Read their answers aloud Copy down -Practice asking and answering the questions Copy the right answers Work in groups to talk about their friends Demonstrate in front of class Listen and copy Consolidation : -Retell the main points of this lesson Homework : Write a paragraph about one close friend ( about 50 words ) Do the exercises in workbook Prepare the next lesson Preparing date: 27/8/2015 Teaching date : 28/8/2015 Unit 1: My friends Period Lesson 4: writing I Objectives: * Teaching points:-By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a paragraph about their close friends - Develop Ss’ writing skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: humourous, elder Structure : Simple present tense III Teaching aids : - Lesson plan , poster, textbooks, cues IV Proceduce: * Organizations : - Greeting and checking attendance * Checking up : Ask Ss to answer the questions about Bao’s friends - Teacher corrects and give them marks * New lesson : Teacher’s activities Warm up ** Slap the board ( Using the words they have learnt in the previous lesson ) Pre - writing : * Reading : - Ask Ss to read the information about Tam , then answer some questions a What is his name ? b How old is he ? c What does he look like ? d What is he like ? e Where does he live ? f Whom does he live with ? g Who is his friend ? - Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the questions above - Correct and give feedback a Le Van Tam b He is 14 c he is tall and thin He has short black hair d He is sociable , humorous and helpful e He lives at 26 Tran Phu Street , Ha Noi f He lives with his mother and an elder brother g Ba and Bao While - writing : - Let Ss write a paragraph about Tam , using the information they have just got - Work individually Then compare with the paragraph in their books - Ask Ss to write some information about one of their friends , then write a paragraph about her / him - Get Ss to share with their partners and correct if possible * Sample : His / her name He / she is years old He / she lives at in with He / she is He / she has hair He / she is .helpful He / she has friends , but his / her close friends are and - Call on some Ss to read their writings aloud Student’s ,activities Play games Read the information about Tam Practice asking and answering the questions Write a paragraph about Tam individually Read their writings aloud Write another paragraph , using the sample Demonstrate in front of class Write about himself / herself Post - writing : Listen and copy - Ask Ss to write a similar paragraph about himself / her self - Go around the class and help Ss , then ask some Ss to speak in front of class a bout himself / herself Consolidation : - Retell the main points of this lesson Homework : Write a paragraph about one of their family members Learn by heart vocabulary and main points Prepare the next lesson Preparing date: 28/8/2015 Teaching date : 29/8/2015 Unit : My friends Period Lesson 5: Language focus I Objectives: *Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to review the simple present tense to talk about general truths and write some sentences , using the structure “ (not) + adjectives enough + to infinitive II Language contents: Vocabulary: - Some active words Grammar: - Simple tense - Present simple to talk about general truths - Not adj + enough + to -inf III Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalks , boards , posters IV Procedures: * Organizations : Greeting and checking attendance * Checking up : check in the new lesson and give them marks * New lesson : Warm up : Teacher’s activities * Kim,s game Student’s ,activities ( Using language focus ) - Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 17 quickly Then let them keep their books closed - Divide the class into four groups - Give Ss two questions , the group which answers correctly the fastest wins the game * Questions: a How many people are there in the picture ? ( Four ) b What is each person wearing ? - The Woman is wearing a red shirt and a green dress - The man who is standing beside the car is wearing brown trousers and a yellow shirt - The man who is standing on the pavement is wearing a pink shirt and blue trousers - The boy is wearing blue shorts and a white shirt Presentation : Grammar : a Present simple : S + V(es/s)… eg: I go on holiday twice a year * Present simple to talk about general truths - It is used to express an action which is always true b Past simple : S + V (ed/ qkbqt)/ was / were + … eg:I missed the train this morning c (not) adjective + enough + to – infinitive Eg: He is old enough to see that film She is not clever enough to this thing Exercises: Ex 1: Complete the paragraphs Use the correct form of the verbs in brackets - Ask Ss to work individually and then compare their answers with their partners - Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud - Correct and give feedback a 1- lives 2- sent 3- was 4- is b 1- are 2- came 3- showed 4- introduced Ex : Complete the dialogue - Explain some new words : + a planet : the sun , the moon , the earth + Mars / Mercury ( translation ) + silly ( adj) ( translation ) - Ask them to read the words in the box - Play game in two teams Ss answer the T’s questions Listen and copy Read the example and give some more Work individually Read their answers aloud Copy down Listen and copy Read the words in the box and complete the dialogue Practice the dialogue Copy down -complete the dialogue Listen carefully - Let them complete the dialogue between Ba and Tuan , his young cousin - Call on some pairs to practice the complete dialogue - Correct their pronunciation and give feedback * keys : 1- sets 2- goes 3- moves 4- is 5- is 6- is Ex : Set the scene to introduce the aims of the exercise : - Ask Ss to work in pairs - Call on some pairs to read the complete dialogue - Correct and give feedback a not big enough b not old enough c strong enough d good enough Consolidation: - Retell the main contents of this lesson Homework : Ask Ss to write five sentences about themselves , using the structure : (not) + adjective enough + to – infinitive Prepare the next lesson Work in pairs Practice the dialogues -work in pairs -Some Ss to retell the main points Listen and copy Preparing date: 07/9/2015 Teaching date : 08/9/2015 Unit Making arrangements Period Lesson : Getting started Listen and read I Objectives: * Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the telephone to make and confirm arrangements - Develop Ss’speaking and listening skills II Language contents: Vocabulary: - Some words of the media Grammar: - Going to - Adv of place III Teaching aids : Textbooks, poster , pictures , radio , CD, lesson plan IV Procedure: * Organizations : - Greeting and checking attendance * Checking up: - Asks Ss to describe the picture , talk about some person in that eg :The man is standing next to the car , He is wearing yellow shirt He is tall and fat - T corrects and give them marks * New lesson : Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up : Matching ( Getting started ) - Ask Ss to match each object with its name - Work in groups of (table ) * Answers : a an answering machine - Match each object with its name b a mobile phone c a fax machine d a telephone directory - Give answer keys e a public telephone f an address book - Give the definitions of these objects on a poster and ask Ss to match the object with its definition * Definition : to send fax  F e e d b a c k Preparing date: 10/9/2015 Teaching date : 11/9/2015 Unit Making arrangements Period Lesson : Speak & L.f 1,2 I Objectives: * Teaching points : - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk on the phone about intentions with “ Going To” II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar - Could I talk to …….? - Review : Would you like to ……/ III Teaching aids : Textbooks , cards , chalks , lesson plan , posters IV Procedures: * Organizations : - Greeting and checking attendance * Checking up : -T asks some questions : Have you got a telephone ? Do you have a telephone at your home ? What is your telephone mumber? - T corrects and give them marks - New lesson : Teacher’s activities Warm up : * Chatting - Talk to Ss to about using telephone Do you have a telephone at home ? How often you make a phone call ? What would you say when you pick up the phone to answer it ? What would you say if you are the caller ? Presentation : Pre- speaking - Ask Ss to exercise in pairs to put the sentences in the correct order to make a complete conversation - Call on some pairs to read their answers and write them on the board : * Answers : 1-b 2-f 3-j 4-a 5-i 6-c 7- e 8- k 9-g 10- h 11- d - Call on some pairs to practice the conversation they have arranged -Ask Ss some questions to check Ss,understanding and focus on the structure GOING TO Student’s ,activities -Some ss to answer the T’s questions Work in whole class Work in pairs Report their answers Practice the complete dialogue - Work in pairs a Are they talking on the phone ? b What they intend to ? c What time are they meeting ? Where ? d What form of the verbs you use to talk about intentions ? => S + BE + GOING TO + Infinitive => Express an intention While - speaking : - Set the scene “ Ba and Bao are making arrangements to play chess “ - Ask Ss to work with partners to complete the dialogue - Call on some pairs to play the roles of Ba and Bao to practice the dialogue - Listen and give feedback Ba : Hello 8257012 Bao : May I speak to Ba , please This is Bao Ba : Hello , Bao How are you ? Bao : I am fine Thanks , and you ? Ba : Great Me too Bao : can you play chess tonight ? Ba : I am sorry I can not play chess tonight I am going to my homework Bao : What about tomorrow afternoon ? Ba : Tomorrow afternoon is fine Bao : I’ll meet you at the Center Chess Club Ba : At the Central Chess Club ? Ok Let ,s meet at the front door Bao : Is 2,00, OK ? Ba : Great See you tomorrow afternoon at 2.00 o,clock Post – speaking : - Ask Ss to make similar dialogue T can emphasise (nhan manh )the useful phrases and sentences Ask Ss to make similar arrangements and practice talking with a partner -Ask Ss to make sentences with “ Going to + Infinitive “ Language focus 1+2 : *Ask ss to ex (25 ) eg : Nga has a movie ticket ( What is she going to do?) + Yes , they are + They intend to go to the pop concert + They are meeting inside the center at 7.15 + be going to Listen and copy down - work individually Listen to teacher carefully Work in pairs Practice the complete dialogue - Work in groups of or Make similar dialogue - work in dividually Practice asking and answering - work in pairs -work individually  She is going to see a movie T gets feedback and give answer keys * Ex ( 25 ) – Ssplay a game : Find someone who … T asks : - What are you going to on the weekend ? Are you going to … ? + … meet your friends ? +… see a movie ? + ….play football ? +….help your parents ? +… ur homeworks ? +… listen to music/ watch T.V…? -T gets feedback Home works - Learn by heart vocabulary and model - Do exercise in the work book - Pre-pare READ  Feedback Preparing date: 11/9/2015 Teaching date : 12/9/2015 Unit Making arrangements Period Lesson : Listen & L F I Objectives: * Teaching points:By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to complete a telephone message by listening -Listening for details and further practice in adverbs of place II Language contents: III Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , postres, lesson plan IV Procedures: * Organizations : - Greeting and checking attendance * Checking up : - Checking in the contents of the new lesson - T corrects and give them marks * New lesson : Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up : * Telephone transmitting - Divide Ss into two teams - Choose volunteers from each team - the volunteers stand in two lines T shows the first student a telephone number - He / She whispers the telephone number to the next person in his / her line Play game - The second student whispers to the third until the last one - The last student has to shout out the number , if it is the same as the number teacher shows , that team wins the match New lesson : Listening: Setting the scene: “ You are going to listen a dialogue on the phone Some Ss Retell the main contents between a secretary of the principal at Kingston - Ss listen carefully High School and a women” - Ss listen and fill ? Listen to the telephone conversation and fill in *Answer Key: the missing information - Date: Ss answer - Time Ss answer - T gives feedback - For The principal - Message: Mrs Mary Nguyen Post- Teach wanted to see you at 9.45 in ? Role play ( one student is Ba, another is Bao) the morning -T call some pairs after Ss finishe -Tel number 6483720942 Revision words: - Ss role play - Junior high school :Truong THCS _ cap - Some ss practice in pair - The principal : hieu truong - (to) wanted - at the moment : lap tuc, 1luc - Copy Down - (an) appointment: cuoc hen gap - available : san co, co hieu luc, co gia tri, co mat Practice : _Lf3Complete the speech bubbles.Use each adverd in the box once -Ask and answer - Ask some Ss to practice asking and answering in pairs 1.here 2.downstairs 3.outside 4.there 5.inside -T gets feedback Consolidations : - Retell the main points of this lesson Homework : Copy the dialogue above Do exercise in workbook Learn by heart the main points and new words Prepare the next lesson -work individually Some Ss Retell the main contents _ copy down homeworks  Feedback Preparing date: 14/9/2015 Teaching date : 15/9/2015 Unit Period 10 Making arrangements Lesson : Read I Ojectives I.Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Alexander Graham Bell - Ss reading for specific ( ro rang , cu the chi tiet)information about Alex G B II Language contents Vocabulary: - Some active word of the test Grammar - Passive voice - Neither…… nor - The past simple III Teaching aids : Textbooks , posters , pictures of Bill , lesson plan IV: Procedure; * Organizations : - Greeting and asks some questions *Checking up : - Asks some Ss to say new words , meaning of these words - T corrects mistakes and gives them marks III.New lesson : Teacher’s activities Warm up : * Brainstorming - Let Ss answer the questions by coming to the board and write : To chat with friend + What is the mobile phone used for ?  Possible answers : - to have a message - to call someone - to make arrangements - to talk to a person who lives far from - to get information at the airport or railway station quickly Pre - reading : - Introduce the aims and some new words to Ss Pre teach( vocabulary) : - to emigrate = to go another country to live ( xuất cảnh, di cư) (emigrant:: người xuất cảnh,sang định cư nước ngoài) - to transmit ( translation )Truyền phát tín hiệu - to conduct = to carry out:thực hiện, tiến hành, Student’s ,activities Play games in teams Read their answers aloud and copy Listen carefully đạo, điều hành - to demonstrate ( translation )= perform - a device ( translation ): thiết bị, máy móc, - deaf – mute( adj) = a person who is unable to hear and speak : tất câm điếc * Checking vocabulary : What and where T / F statements prediction : - Hang the poster of T / F statements on the board and ask Ss to work in pairs and guess which statements are true or false …….a Alexander G Bell was born in the USA …….b He worked with deaf – mute patients in a hospital in Boston …….c Thomas Watson was Bell,s assistant … d Bell and Watson introduced the telephone in 1877 ……e Bell experimented his invention at a lot of exhibitions - Call on some pairs to read their predictions and write them on the board While - reading : * True or false : -Turn on the tape times and ask them to look at their books to read the text , then check their prediction Guess Answer Correction a F b F c d e T F F He was born in Edinburgh in Scotland He worked with deaf – mute patients at Boston University He introduced telephone in 1876 He experimented with ways of transmitting speech over a long distance f T - Ask some Ss to read the correct answers aloud * Ordering : - Ask Ss to look at the exercise and read the events of Bell,s life , then put them in the correct order - Have them compare with their partners - Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud - Corrects and give feedback = > Alexander Graham Bell Was born in Scotland went to live in Canada went to live in the USA worked with people who could neither speak Listen and repeat in chorus , then individually Guess its meanings Copy down Play game Look at the poster and work in pairs to predict Read their predictions Listen , read the text , then check their predictions -work in pairs - Correct the false ones (one by one.) Read them aloud Do the exercise Read their answers work in pairs -Read their correct sentences aloud -Write individually nor hear worked with Thomas Watson successfully demonstrate his invention invented the telephone - Call on some Ss to read all the correct order sentences aloud Compare with their partners Read their writings aloud Post - reading : * Write it up : - Get Ss to write a paragraph about Bell,s life , using the information from the text - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front of class - Correct mistakes if any and give Suggestions Consolidations: -Retell the main contents of this lesson Homework : Copy down their writings Do the exercises in workbook Prepare the next lesson - Copy down homeworks * Feedback Preparing date: 17/9/2015 Teaching date : 18/9/2015 Unit Period 11 Making arrangements - Lesson 4: write I Objectives: * Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a telephone message - Develop Ss’ wrinting skill II Language content: vocabulary: Struture: - Past simple ( review) III.Teaching aids : Textbooks , posters , lesson plan, IV Procedure: * Organizations: - Greeting and checking attendance *Checking up : Checking up in the new lesson T corrects and give marks * New lesson : Feedback Teacher’s activities Warm up : * Matching : - T hang a poster, ask Ss to go to the board and matching - customer • su phuc vu - furniture • loi nhan, tin nhan - stationery • khach hang - midday • van phong pham - service • buoi trua, giua - message • dac + T corrects the mistakes Pre - writing : * Chatting : – Talk to Ss about taking a telephone message  Have you ever taken a message ,  When you take a message , what should be mentioned in the message ? ( Date , time who sent , to whom , content ) Pre – teach( vocabulary ): - (a) customer = a person who comes to buy something at a shop - (a) delivery : su giao hang (Trans…) - stationery ( papers ,pens , pencils , rulers ): văn phòng phẩm - (to) pick somebody up :đón phương tiện gì - (to) taken by :được nhận - (to) reach : đến, tới gặp * Checking vocabulary : Rubout and remember While - writing : Reading and gap filling - Ask Ss to read the message and fill in the gaps in the message - Ask them to work in pairs - Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud Corrects and give feedback A customer phoned/telephoned the Thang Loi Delivery Service on May 12 just before midday She wanted to speak to Mr Ha but he was out So Mr Tam took a message for Mr Ha The customer,s name was Mrs Lien and she wanted to know about her furniture delivery She wanted Mr Ha to call her She said Mr Ha could reach her number 8645141 after lunch - Ask Ss to read the passage to get information and write the message - Let Ss write individually then share with a partner - Call on some Ss to read their answers - Correct and give feedback Write : - Asks Ss to write a message using the informations from the passage in write (23) - Asks Ss to share with other groups - T hang some posters of their on the bb Thanh Cong Delivery Service Student’s ,activities Play game Practice asking and answering the questions Listen and repeat in chorus , individually Guess its meanings Copy down Play games Read and the exercise Read their answers aloud - Work in pairs Read the information and write the message Read their answers Copy down Preparing date: 18/9/2015 Teaching date : 19/9/2015 Period 12 Unit At home Lesson : Getting started + Listen and read I Objectives: * Teaching points : - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue and use modal verbs to talk about the housework II Language contents: Vocabulary: Some of words about the object which are used for cooking Grammar: have to , ought to III Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , pictures, postes, lesson plan IV Procedure: * Organization : - Greetinmg and checking attendance * Checking up : -T asks Ss some questions : -What did you to help your mom after school? - Asks some Ss to answer the questions T corrects and give them marks * possible answers : - cook meas / wash clothes / Tidy up / Feed the chicken / sweep the floor… * New lesson : Teacher’s activities Warm up : * Kim,s game ( Getting started ) - Show pictures to Ss and ask them to look at pictures quickly in 30 seconds and try to remember the verbs in the pictures as many as possible - Which team remembering more verbs is the winner  Answer : a Wash dishes / the washing up b Make the bed / to fold the clothes neatly( gap quan ao ngan) c Sweep the floor /d Cook / e Tidy up f Feed the chicken * Presentation : Introduce the topic of the passage and some new words * Pre- teach (Vocabulary ): - (a) steamer : nồi hấp, nồi đun -( a) cupboard : chạn , tủ chạn -( a) saucepan : chảo - chore (n) : việc vặt nhà, công việc nội trợ -( a) sink : bồn rửa, chậu rửa * Checking techniques : What and where - Set the scene of the dialogue between Nam and his mother , Mrs Vui - Ask Ss to complete the list of the things Nam has to Student’s ,activities Play game _ Some Ss stand up and speak loudly - Copy new lesson read in chorus Listen and copy down Repeat in chorus and individually Guess its meanings and copy Play game - Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books and read their complete sentences : * Nam has to: - cook dinner - go to the market to buy fish and vegestables - call his Aunt , Ms Chi and ask her to meet his mother at grandma,s house Has / Have to + Infinitive = Must + Infinitive Model : What you have to ? I must the washing up -> Use the picture cues drill : a the washing up / b make the bed c sweep the floor /d cook dinner e tidy my room / f feed the chickens - Call on some Ss to practice in front of class * Have Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs Language focus : - Reflexive pronouns : Form: I -> myself./ We -> ourselves / … Usage : Ex ercise: Asks Ss to exercise (35) - Complete the dialogues - T corrects and give answer keys Listen carefully Listen to the tape while looking at their books Read their sentences they have completed Copy and give examples Practice in pairs Read the dialogue in pairs Write individually + Production : - Ask Ss to write the lists of the things they have to Demonstrate their writings on Sundays Beginning with : On Sunday morning , I have to tidy my room - Call on some Ss to read their writings in front of class Listen and copydown homeworks - Correct mistakes if any and ask them to copy Consolidation: - Retell the main contents of this leson Homework : Learn by heart all new words they have learnt Do their exercises in workbook Prepare the next lesson Feedback Preparing date: 21/9/2015 Teaching date : 22/9/2015 Period 13 I Objectives: Unit Lesson : Speak I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the prepositions of places to talk about the positions in the house - Develop’s Ss speaking skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: Things in the kichen and living room Grammar: Review: Where is…….? It’s………… Where are……? They are………… Let’s…………… I think we ought to……… II Teaching aids : Pictures , chalks , leson plan, poster B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organizations: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up :Asks some Ss to retell the new words of last lesson - T corrects and give marks III New lesson : Teacher’s activities Warm up : * Kim,sgame - Devide the class into teams - Show the picture of a chicken to Ss - Ask them to study the things in the picture - Take away the picture and ask Ss to write down as many things as they can remember - Which team having more things win games Pre - Speaking : - Ask Ss the positions of the items in the pictures Where is the clock ? It is above the fridge Where is the fruit ? It is in the bowl Where is the flowers ? They are on the table Where is the rice cooker ? It is next to the bwl of fruit Where is the cupboard ? It is on the wall , above the counter Where are the knives ? They are on the wall , under the cupboard Where is the dish rack ? It is on the counter , next to the bowl of fruit - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions While - speaking : - Get Ss to work in pairs , talking about the position of each item Ex : The calendar is on the wall , above the stove Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class - Give feedback : + The sink is next to the stove + The cupboard is on the wall , above the counter + The knives are on the wall , under the cupboard + The bowl of fruit is between the rice cooker and the dish rack Student’s ,activities Play game Practice asking and answering about the positions of each item Work in pairs + The clock is on the wall , above the fridge + The flowers are on the table - Ask them to read all the suggested sentences aloud Post - speaking : - Set the scene : Mrs Vui bought new furniture for her living room , but she can not decide where to put it You should help her to arrange the furniture” - Ask Ss to look at the picture and talk about their ideas  Ask Ss to practice speaking : - If they agree , they may use : Ok You are right - If they disagree , they may use : No , I think we ,d better / ought to put I think it should be Example : - Let us put the clock on the wall , between the shelf and the picture - OK I think we ought to put the TV and the stereo on the shelf … - Call on some pairs to practice speaking Consolidation : - Retell the main contents of this lesson Homework : Describe their living room or bedroom Do exercise in workbook Prepare the next lesson Read all the sentences aloud Listen carefully Copy down Read the examples Practice speaking Listen and copy  Feedback Preparing date:24/9/2015 Teaching date : 25/9/2015 Period 14 Unit Lesson : Listen I Objectives: *Teching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to identify the right item by listening - Develop Ss listening skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: Some ingredients Grammar: III Teaching aids : Cassette , textbooks , chalks , lesson plan , poster IV Procedures: * Organization : - Greeting and checking attendance * Checking up : - Asks Ss complete the list of things Nam has to ex2 ( 28 ) – Students to talk - Two others Use “ought to” to give advice b- d (35) + T corrects and give answer keys => give them marks * Keys ( possible answer): 1) - He has to go to the market to buy fish and vegetables - He has to call Aunt Chi ask her to meet his mother at his grandma’s house 2) – b- You ought to get up earlier - d – You ought to go to a dentist * New lesson : Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up : * Bingo - Ask Ss to write down on their notebooks things you can eat - Prepare a list of food Then call out each word in a loud voice - Ss listen to the teacher carefully If anyone has the same things , they cross them out The first person crossing out all things shouts “ Bingo “ and wins the game  Suggested list of food : Chickens , beef , cake , candy , garlic , noodles , bread , rice , ham , peas Pre - listening : * Predictions : - Get Ss to look at page 30 and guess things they use to cook the Special Chinese Fried Rice “ - Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board While - listening : - Turn on the tape times and ask them to check their predictions - Give feedback a Fired Rice b Pan c Garlic and green peppers d Ham and peas - Turn on the tape once more to check the answers again Post - listening : Mapped dialogue - Ask Ss to play the roles of Lan and Mrs Tu to make a dialogue by listening the tape again Lan : Can I help , Mom ? Mrs Tu : Sure you can cook Use the big pan please Lan : ? Mrs Tu : Just a little Wait until it is hot and then Play game -Look at their books and guess things , they use to cook the “ Special Chinese Fried Rice “ - Read their predictions Listen to the tape carefully to check their predictions Copy the answers Listen and check once more Listen individually Practice in pairs to make a dialogue Work inpairs Practice in front of class Listen and copy fry the garlic and the green peppers Lan : .? Mrs Tu : Yes And you can put the rice and s teaspoon of salt in Lan : YUmmy ! It smells - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of class - Correct pronunciations if any Consolidations: Retell the main points of this lesson Homework : Copy down the dialogue in their notebooks Do exercise in workbook Prepare the next lesson - Work individually - copy down homeworks  Feedback Test 15 minutes Class: 8… Name: ………………………………… I.Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng A,B,C or D They enjoy ……………… books A to read B read C reading What does your friend look ……………….? A likes B like C likely Mrs Thanh has ……………….hair A long straight back B black long straight C long black straight My brother is not ……………….to drive a car A old enough for B enough old C old enough Her sister ……………… A new dress two days ago A buy B will C bought II Viết lại câu theo gợi ý Thanh (phone) ……………… You when he comes back.( Cho dạng đúng động từ ngoặc) 2.She is not tall She can’t be a good basketball player.( dùng enough)  ……………….……………….……………… The flowers aren’t very lovely.They dislike them .( dùng enough)  ……………….……………….……………… Ho Chi Minh City is an important ………………………… center ( commerce ) ( Cho dạng đúng từ ngoặc)  ……………….……………….……………… 5.He is strong He can carry the box .( dùng enough)  ………………………………………………… Test 15 minutes Class: 8… Name: ………………………………… I.Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng A,B,C or D They enjoy ……………… books A to read B read C reading What does your friend look ……………….? A likes B like C likely Mrs Thanh has ……………….hair A long straight back B black long straight C long black straight My brother is not ……………….to drive a car A old enough for B enough old C old enough Her sister ……………… A new dress two days ago A buy B will C bought II Viết lại câu theo gợi ý Thanh (phone) ……………… You when he comes back.( Cho dạng đúng động từ ngoặc) 2.She is not tall She can’t be a good basketball player.( dùng enough)  ……………….……………….……………… The flowers aren’t very lovely.They dislike them .( dùng enough)  ……………….……………….……………… Ho Chi Minh City is an important ………………………… center ( commerce ) ( Cho dạng đúng từ ngoặc)  ……………….……………….……………… 5.He is strong He can carry the box .( dùng enough)  ………………………………………………… Preparing date: 25/9/2015 Teaching date : 26/9/2015 Period 15 Unit Lesson : Read + Language focus A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the safety precautions in the house and use Why- because - Develop Ss’ reading skill II Languge contents: III Teaching aids : Textbooks , Cassette , pictures , realias , lesson plan B/ Steps of the lesson : I Organization : Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: Asks Ss talk some steps to make the “Special Chinese Fried Rice” - T corrects and give them marks *Possible answers : 1.Put the little oil in the big pan Heat the pan Fry the garlic and the green peppers Put the ham and peas in Put the rice and teaspoon of salt in III New lesson : Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up : Brainstorming  Possible answers : drug / electricity / boiling water / fire / gas / knife./ bead / glass … Things danger in home for children - Ask them to copy down Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss Pre – teach vocabulary : - a precaution = sù phßng ngõa , sù ®ề phßng - a socket ( realia ) / a bead : vật tròn nhỏ - a match ( realia ) - an object = vật , đồ vật - safety (n ) = sù an toµn - to destroy = ph¸ huû - to injure ( situation ) : Gây thương tích * Checking : Slap the board True / false statements predictions Play game in two teams Write down Listen to the topic Listen and repeat in chorus and individually - Ask Ss to read the statements and guess which is true , which is false Guess its meaning s and copy Statements Guess Key F It is safe to leave medicine around the house T Drugs can look like candy F A kitchen is a suitable place to play F Playing with one match can T not start a fife Putting a knife into an T electrical socket is dangerous Young children not understand that many house hold objects are dangerous - Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board While - reading : Reading the text : - Turn on the tape , Ss look at poster to check their prediction - Have them correct the statements which are false It is safe to keep medicine in locked cupboards A kitchen is dangerous place to play Playing with one match can cause fire Play game in teams Read and predict Read their predictions aloud Listen to the tape look at the poster to check their predictions * Feedback Preparing date: 28/9/2015 Teaching date : 29/9/2015 Period 16 Unit Lesson : Write A / Objectives: I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a description of a room in their house - Develop Ss writing skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: Some object in the kitchen Grammar: preposition of position III.Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalks , board , lesson plan B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization : Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: Asks Ss to say some things danger in home for children - T corrects and give them marks III New lesson : Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up : * Chatting ( Asking something about the room on page 32 ) Which room is this ? What is this ? / Where is it ? Play game Pre - writing : Introduce the aims and some new words to Ss : Listen and copy the title of the Pre- teach vocabulary : lesson - folder (n)bìa - beneath : (pre) Khoảng > < above Listen and repeat in chorus , - dish rack (n) gía để bát đĩa individually - lighting fixture (n) đèn chùm Guess its meanings and copy - Container : (n) cái đựng , cái chứa ( chai , lo, Play game bình…) * Checking : Rub out and remember Reading - Ask Ss to read the description of Hoa,sroom , then ask some comprehension questions a What is there on the left of the room ? Read the description and practice b Where is the bookshelf ? asking and answering the questions c What is there on the right side of the room ? - work in pairs d Where is the wardrobe ? - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class - Correct and give feedback : a There is a desk on the left of the room b The bookshelf is above the desk Read the description aloud c There is a window on the right side of the room d The wardrobe is beside the window and Work individually opposite the desk - Call on some Ss to read the descriptions of Hoa,s Compare with their friends room aloud While - writing : Demonstrate their writings in front - Ask Ss to describe Hoa,s kitchen , using the of class given cues - Ask Ss to share with their partners - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front of class - Describe the Hoa’skitchen - Correct the mistakes from some descriptions if - Work individually any - Give feedback This is Hoa,s kitchen There is a refrigerator in the right corner of the room Next to the refrigerator are the stove and the oven On the other side of the oven , there is a sink and next to the sink is a towel rack The disk rack stands on the counter , on the right of the window and beneath the selves On the selves and on the counter beneath the window, there are jars of sugar , flour and tea In the middle of the kitchen , there are a table and four chairs The lighting fixture is above the table , and directly beneath the lighting fixture is a vase with flowers - Call on some Ss to read the completed descriptions aloud Post- writing : * Speaking - Ask Ss to talk to their partners about their room / living room / kitchen - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their speeches in front of class Consolidation: - Retell the main contents of this lesoon Homework : Write a description of their living room Do exercises in workbook Prepare the next lesson * Feedback Read the completed writing aloud (one by one) Practice speaking Demonstrate in front of class Preparing date: 01/10/2015 Teaching date : 02/10/2015 Period 17 Unit Lesson : Language focus 1,2,3 A/ Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the Reflexive Pronouns , modal verbs to talk about the house work and know how to use Why - Because II.Teaching aids : Textbook , boards , chalks , lesson plan,posters III Language contents: vocabulary: Unit Grammar: Reflexive pronouns, modal verbs Why- because B/ Steps of the lesson : I Organization: - Greeting and Ask some questions II Checking up: T asks some Qs in Ex2 (32) - Ss answer the questions - T corrects and give them marks III New lesson : Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up : * Brainstorming - tidy up - our homework Things you - cook can - water flower Play game in two teams - clean the floor - one by one of each team to talk - repair the machine - fix the TV set Things you - paint the house can not - Call on some Ss to talk with “ Can “ - Listen and correct mistakes if any Language focus : Reflexive pronouns - Set the scene “ You your homework and no one helps you What you say ? “ I did my homework myself -> Explain the reflexive Pronouns - > Form : We use I with myself You yourself / yourselves He himself She herself We ourselves They themselves It itself - Emphasis( nhan manh, tam quan trong) pronouns : Used to emphasize a person or a thing Eg : She cut herself John saw himself in the mirror  Complete the dialogue : - Ask Ss to fill in the blanks with suitable reflexive pronouns or emphasis pronouns - Call on some pairs to practice speaking - Give feedback : a himself b ourselves c myself / yourself d himself / herself / themselves e yourself - Ask them to practice the complete dialogue Modal verbs - Set the scene : “ Hoa is very sad because she failed her English test What you say to advise her ? “ “ You should study harder “  Another word for “ should “ : Ought to Ought to + Infinitive Exercises: - Ex : Ask Ss to give advice to people in the pictures ( Language focus ) - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class - Give feedback : a I failed my English test You ought to study harder Talk the things you can / can not Listen to the scene and answer the questions - - Work individually Write down and give examples - Work in pairs to complete the dialogue - Practice speaking - Wrks in pairs Listen and copy - Practice in front of class - copy down if necessary - Works in pairs b You ought to get up earlier c You ought to eat more fruit and vegetables d You ought to see a dentist * Checking : Noughts and crosses : His tooth / Hoa / late My room / ache untidy The floor / Bao / She / thin dirty overweight My English / Hergrades / The washing bad bad machine / not work  Using “ Should “ to play game Ex : Look at the pictures Complete the dialogue , Use Must or Have to and the verbs in the box : - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue : - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class - Give feedback must / have to tidy ; have to / must dust must / have to sweep ; must / have to clean have to / must empty ; must / have to feed Consolidation: Retell contents of this lesson Homework : Do exercises in the workbook Copy all the exercises above Prepare the test * Feedback Play game in two teams Work in pairs -> Demonstrate in front of class Listen and copy Preparing date: 02/10/2015 Teaching date : 03/10/2015 Period 18 : Consolidation A/ Objectives: I Teaching Points : - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate all structure grammar from unit to unit They can to all exercises in work book - Develop Ss’ skills ( listening, Speaking, reading and writing.) II Laguage contents: Vocabulary: Gramamar: III Preparation: Lesson plan, textbook, posters B/ Steps of the lesson: I.Organization : - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: - Asks some Ss retell some structure grammar from unit 1to unit -T copy down on the board - T.hang a poster give main structure grammar, and give them marks.III III.New lesson: Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities New lesson : Asks Ss to exercises Using some old structure grammar.( T hang a poster , give Play game some Structure Grammar) Ex : Choose the best answer to complete the sentences: He’s tall and thin He has _ Listen and copy down A black hair short B short black hair C hair short black D black short hair I find he is not communicative He’s rather _ Work in pairs A outgoing B humorous C sociable D reserved Don’t let your little brother play with the ballpoint pen It can Read the example _him A move B sweep C injure D destroy The lighting fixture is the dinner table A above B on C beneath D under He’ll cook meals himself A can B must C have to D ought to Deaf-mutes can _speak hear A both – and B either – or C neither – nor D not only – but also Our son is old enough to look after _ A himself B herself C myself D ourselves Don’t come in Please wait _for your turn A inside B outside C upstairs D downstairs Alexander Graham Bell was born March, 3, 1847 A at B in C on D from 10 Would you like to go to the concert with me tonight? - _ A Yes, please B No, thanks C I’m sorry I’d love to D Yes I’d love to Rewrite each sentence keeping the same meaing: Your little brother can’t study in this school because he is still young Your little brother isn’t Her hair is short, curly and blonde She has Driving too fast is very dangerous It Do you plan to invite her to your birthday party ? Are _ Ask Ss to exercise.They have to work with a partner and say what the people are going to - Ask Ss to go to the board to exercises Look at the piture and describe the bedroom with the things below: This is my Lan’s bedroom Read their complete sentences Work in pairs - Choose the best answer - Demonstrate in front of class Work individually , one student one word Go to the board to write the meanings and read them aloud Listen to the scene Work in pairs Read out the speech bubbles Read the complete sentences aloud Copy down Do exercise - Work in pairs Describe the picture - One by one to talk loudly - The others write down on their notebooks There / a desk / the left / the room There / a chair / the desk The bed / the middle / the room On the right side / the room there / a window The clock / the wall, / the bed The bookshelf / the wall, /the desk The wardrobe / the desk The cushion / the bed Consolidation : - Retell the main contents of this lesson Homework : 1.Copy the complete exercises in their notebooks Write six sentences about your house , using adverbs of place Prepare the next lesson * Feedback -Retell the main points Copy down homeworks Preparing date: 05/10/2015 Teaching date : 06/10/2015 Period: 19 Test No 1-Time: 45 minutes A/ Objective: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to well the test with the knowledge they achieved in the previous lessons B/ Language content : + Vocab : Words describing people + Grammar : Present simple, past simple , modal verbs , prepositions *- Ma trËn: NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiÓu VËn dông Chủ đề Tæng sè TN TN TL TL TN TL 4 I Listening 1,0 1,0 II Reading III Language focus IV Writing Tæng sè: 2,0 1,0 1,0 2,0 16 5,0 2,0 16 4,0 2,0 10 1,0 12 4,0 10 1,0 14 3,0 38 10 (Code 1) I.Listen carefully and circle thecorrect answer in A, B, C or D (1m) 1.Lan is helping her Mum to cook A.breakfast B dinner C.lunch D.dessert 2.She should put a little in the special Chinese fried rice A soy sauce B water C oil D glutamate 3.She fries the garlic and the A.green peppers B cucumbers C carrots D tomatoes 4.The special Chinese fried rice smells ………………… A awful B terrible C delicious D horrible II Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others (1m) A fry B Candy C many D Happy A knife B Sink C Fire D rice A slim B thin C visit D smile A character B children C Christmas III Choose the underlined word that needs correcting (1m): This Moon cakes isn’t good enough for children to eat D school A B C D I believe that friends plays an important role in our life A B C D The student ought to learn their lessons careful before the exam A B C D Don’t worry so much The children can looking after themselves A B C D IV Rewrite the following sentences (2ms) 1.Lan is very interested in films and Lan is free tonight (be going to) →……………………………………………………………………………… My sister is old She can drive a car (enough) →……………………………………………………………………………… 3.I feel sick (go to the doctor) (give advice) →……………………………………………………………………………… I went to school late because I played game late last night (make question) →.……………………………………………… ……………………….? V Read the passage and as direct (2.0ms) Sir Isaac Newton (1642 - 1727) was an English scientist who made great contributions to physics, optics, maths and astronomy He is known for his Three Laws of Motion and the Universal Law of Gravitation When Sir Isaac Newton was a boy, he was more interested in making mechanical devices than in studying He made a windmill which could grind wheat and corn, and he made a water clock and a sundial His teachers thought he was not a very intelligent student because he didn’t very well One day when he was drinking tea in the garden, he saw an apple fall to the ground He started thinking about why it fell Why did the apple fall out of the tree? He finally decided that a force called gravity, which caused the apple to fall also kept the moon in the sky around the earth This same force called gravity, also kept the planets in the sky around the sun The apple incident led to his three basic laws of motion *Check true (T) /false (F): Isaac Newton died in 1727 …………………… Isaac Newton was interested in studying when he was a boy .………………… *Answer the questions: What is he known for? ……………………………………………………………………………………… What led to his three basic laws of motion? ……………………………………………………………………………………… VI Multiple choices (2.0ms): I ……………a letter to my old friend last week A spoke B sends C sent D buy He is………… to ride his bike to school A.not old enough B.old not enough C not enough old D.enough not old He enjoys………… to music while he is studying A listening B listen C listens D to listen A child whose parents have died is called a(n)………………… A neighbor B orphan C nephew D cousin Lan is very shy but her sister is……………… A kind B generous C reserved D outgoing Alexander Graham Bell was born…………March 3, 1847 A on B in C at D during It is dangerous to let children………… in the kitchen A to play B play C playing D to playing The children are not old enough to look after…………… A themselves B their C them D they VII write a description of the living room in your house (1m) …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………… (Code 2) I Listen carefully and circle thecorrect answer in A, B, C or D (1m) Lan is cooking the Chinese fried for her mom A noodles B rice C vegetables D fish She uses the A small pan B big steamer C big pan D small saucepan 3.She fries the garlic and the A.green peppers B cucumbers C carrots D tomatoes She adds a teapoon of into the rice A flour B pepper C salt D sugar II Multiple choices (2.0ms): I ……………a letter to my old friend last week A spoke B sends C sent D buy 2.He is………… to ride his bike to school A.not old enough B.old not enough C not enough old D.enough not old He enjoys………… to music while he is studying A listening B listen C listens D to listen A child whose parents have died is called a(n)………………… A neighbor B orphan C nephew D cousin Lan is very shy but her sister is……………… A kind B generous C reserved D outgoing Alexander Graham Bell was born…………March 3, 1847 A on B in C at D during It is dangerous to let children………… in the kitchen A to play B play C playing D to playing The children are not old enough to look after…………… A themselves B their C them D they III Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others (1m) A fry B Candy C many D happy A knife B Sink C Fire D rice A slim B thin C visit D smile A character B children C Christmas D school IV Choose the underlined word that needs correcting (1m): This Moon cakes isn’t good enough for children to eat A B C D I believe that friends plays an important role in our life A B C D The student ought to learn their lessons careful before the exam A B C D Don’t worry so much The children can looking after themselves A B C D V Read the passage and as direct (2.5ms) Sir Isaac Newton (1642 - 1727) was an English scientist who made great contributions to physics, optics, maths and astronomy He is known for his Three Laws of Motion and the Universal Law of Gravitation When Sir Isaac Newton was a boy, he was more interested in making mechanical devices than in studying He made a windmill which could grind wheat and corn, and he made a water clock and a sundial His teachers thought he was not a very intelligent student because he didn’t very well One day when he was drinking tea in the garden, he saw an apple fall to the ground He started thinking about why it fell Why did the apple fall out of the tree? He finally decided that a force called gravity, which caused the apple to fall also kept the moon in the sky around the earth This same force called gravity, also kept the planets in the sky around the sun The apple incident led to his three basic laws of motion *Check true (T) /false (F): Isaac Newton died in 1727 ……………… Isaac Newton was interested in studying when he was a boy ……………… *Answer the questions: What is he known for? ……………………………………………………………………………………… What led to his three basic laws of motion? ……………………………………………………………………………………… VI Rewrite the following sentences (2ms) Lan is very interested in films and Lan is free tonight (be going to) →……………………………………………………………………………… My sister is old She can drive a car (enough) →……………………………………………………………………………… 3.I feel sick (go to the doctor) (give advice) →……………………………………………………………………………… I went to school late because I played game late last night (make question) →.……………………………………………… ……………………….? VII write a description of the living room in your house (1m) …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………… Preparing date: 08/10/2015 Teaching date : 09/10/2015 Period 20 CORRECTION OF THE WRITTEN TEST No Time: 45 minutes A.Aim: - Help Ss to correct some mistakes of the test No.1 and help them to understand what they have learn more clearly -Hand out the test with the marks given B Organization: -Greeting and checking the total of the class Asking some questions about health, weather C New lesson: 1.Warm up: * Play with words: Helps SS to review some words that they have learn and they have met in the test Correction: -Find out the usual mistakes / error in Ss’writing test + Reading: some Ss don’t understand the main ideas of the test so they have wrong answers of T/F + Language focus: Simple past tense, simple present tense Structure: tobe (not) + adj + enough + to inf The key answers: * / Written test No.1 I.Listen carefully and circle thecorrect answer in A, B, C or D (1m) 1.Lan is helping her Mum to cook A.breakfast B dinner C.lunch D.dessert 2.She should put a little in the special Chinese fried rice A soy sauce B water C oil D glutamate 3.She fries the garlic and the A.green peppers B cucumbers C carrots D tomatoes 4.The special Chinese fried rice smells ………………… A awful B terrible C delicious D horrible II Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others (1m) A fry B Candy C many D Happy A knife B Sink C Fire D rice A slim B thin C visit D smile A character B children C Christmas D school III Choose the underlined word that needs correcting (1m): This Moon cakes isn’t good enough for children to eat A B C D I believe that friends plays an important role in our life A B C D The student ought to learn their lessons careful before the exam A B C D Don’t worry so much The children can looking after themselves A B C D IV Rewrite the following sentences (2ms) Lan is very interested in films and Lan is free tonight (be going to) →She is going to see a movie My sister is old She can drive a car (enough) →My sister is old enough to drive a car 3.I feel sick (go to the doctor) (give advice) →You should go to the doctor 4.Why did you go to school late? (make question) → I went to school late because I played game late last night V Read the passage and as direct (2.0ms) Sir Isaac Newton (1642 - 1727) was an English scientist who made great contributions to physics, optics, maths and astronomy He is known for his Three Laws of Motion and the Universal Law of Gravitation When Sir Isaac Newton was a boy, he was more interested in making mechanical devices than in studying He made a windmill which could grind wheat and corn, and he made a water clock and a sundial His teachers thought he was not a very intelligent student because he didn’t very well One day when he was drinking tea in the garden, he saw an apple fall to the ground He started thinking about why it fell Why did the apple fall out of the tree? He finally decided that a force called gravity, which caused the apple to fall also kept the moon in the sky around the earth This same force called gravity, also kept the planets in the sky around the sun The apple incident led to his three basic laws of motion *Check true (T) /false (F): Isaac Newton died in 1727 T Isaac Newton was interested in studying when he was a boy F *Answer the questions: What is he known for? He is known for his Three Laws of Motion and the Universal Law of Gravitation What led to his three basic laws of motion? The apple incident led to his three basic laws of motion VI Multiple choices (2.0ms): I ……………a letter to my old friend last week A spoke B sends C sent D buy He is………… to ride his bike to school A.not old enough B.old not enough C not enough old D.enough not old He enjoys………… to music while he is studying A listening B listen C listens D to listen A child whose parents have died is called a(n)………………… A neighbor B orphan C nephew D cousin Lan is very shy but her sister is……………… A kind B generous C reserved D outgoing Alexander Graham Bell was born…………March 3, 1847 A on B in C at D during It is dangerous to let children………… in the kitchen A to play B play C playing D to playing The children are not old enough to look after…………… A themselves B their C them D they VII write a description of the living room in your house (1m) - Ask Ss to write the right content of the description (Code 2) I Listen carefully and circle thecorrect answer in A, B, C or D (1m) Lan is cooking the Chinese fried for her mom A noodles B rice C vegetables D fish She uses the A small pan B big steamer C big pan D small saucepan 3.She fries the garlic and the A.green peppers B cucumbers C carrots D tomatoes She adds a teapoon of into the rice A flour B pepper C salt D sugar II Multiple choices (2.5ms): I ……………a letter to my old friend last week A spoke B sends C sent D buy He is………… to ride his bike to school A.not old enough B.old not enough C not enough old D.enough not old He enjoys………… to music while he is studying A listening B listen C listens D to listen A child whose parents have died is called a(n)………………… A neighbor B orphan C nephew D cousin Lan is very shy but her sister is……………… A kind B generous C reserved D outgoing Alexander Graham Bell was born…………March 3, 1847 A on B in C at D during It is dangerous to let children………… in the kitchen A to play B play C playing D to playing The children are not old enough to look after…………… A themselves B their C them D they III Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others (1m) A fry B Candy C many D happy A knife B Sink C Fire D rice A slim B thin C visit D smile A character B children C Christmas D school IV Choose the underlined word that needs correcting (1m): This Moon cakes isn’t good enough for children to eat A B C D I believe that friends plays an important role in our life A B C D The student ought to learn their lessons careful before the exam A B C D Don’t worry so much The children can looking after themselves A B V Read the passage and as direct (2.5ms) C D Sir Isaac Newton (1642 - 1727) was an English scientist who made great contributions to physics, optics, maths and astronomy He is known for his Three Laws of Motion and the Universal Law of Gravitation When Sir Isaac Newton was a boy, he was more interested in making mechanical devices than in studying He made a windmill which could grind wheat and corn, and he made a water clock and a sundial His teachers thought he was not a very intelligent student because he didn’t very well One day when he was drinking tea in the garden, he saw an apple fall to the ground He started thinking about why it fell Why did the apple fall out of the tree? He finally decided that a force called gravity, which caused the apple to fall also kept the moon in the sky around the earth This same force called gravity, also kept the planets in the sky around the sun The apple incident led to his three basic laws of motion *Check true (T) /false (F): Isaac Newton died in 1727 T Isaac Newton was interested in studying when he was a boy F *Answer the questions: What is he known for? He is known for his Three Laws of Motion and the Universal Law of Gravitation What led to his three basic laws of motion? ->The apple incident led to his three basic laws of motion VI Rewrite the following sentences (2ms) Lan is very interested in films and Lan is free tonight (be going to) →She is going to see a movie My sister is old She can drive a car (enough) →My sister is old enough to drive a car 3.I feel sick (go to the doctor) (give advice) -> You should go to the doctor 4.Why did you go to the school late ? (make question) → I went to school late because I played game late last night VII write a description of the living room in your house (1m) - Ask Ss to write the right content of the description WRITTEN TEST Time: 45 M-(Code 1) Full name: ………………………… Class:8……………… I.Listen carefully and circle thecorrect answer in A, B, C or D (1m) 1.Lan is helping her Mum to cook A.breakfast B dinner C.lunch D.dessert 2.She should put a little in the special Chinese fried rice A soy sauce B water C oil D glutamate 3.She fries the garlic and the A.green peppers B cucumbers C carrots D tomatoes 4.The special Chinese fried rice smells ………………… A awful B terrible C delicious D horrible II Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others (1m) A fry B Candy C many D Happy A knife B Sink C Fire D rice A slim B thin C visit D smile A character B children C Christmas D school III Choose the underlined word that needs correcting (1m): This Moon cakes isn’t good enough for children to eat A B C D I believe that friends plays an important role in our life A B C D The student ought to learn their lessons careful before the exam A B C D Don’t worry so much The children can looking after themselves A B C D IV Rewrite the following sentences (2ms) 1.Lan is very interested in films and Lan is free tonight (be going to) →……………………………………………………………………………… My sister is old She can drive a car (enough) →……………………………………………………………………………… 3.I feel sick (go to the doctor) (give advice) →……………………………………………………………………………… I went to school late because I played game late last night (make question) →.……………………………………………… ……………………….? V Read the passage and as direct (2.0ms) Sir Isaac Newton (1642 - 1727) was an English scientist who made great contributions to physics, optics, maths and astronomy He is known for his Three Laws of Motion and the Universal Law of Gravitation When Sir Isaac Newton was a boy, he was more interested in making mechanical devices than in studying He made a windmill which could grind wheat and corn, and he made a water clock and a sundial His teachers thought he was not a very intelligent student because he didn’t very well One day when he was drinking tea in the garden, he saw an apple fall to the ground He started thinking about why it fell Why did the apple fall out of the tree? He finally decided that a force called gravity, which caused the apple to fall also kept the moon in the sky around the earth This same force called gravity, also kept the planets in the sky around the sun The apple incident led to his three basic laws of motion *Check true (T) /false (F): Isaac Newton died in 1727 ………… Isaac Newton was interested in studying when he was a boy ………… *Answer the questions: What is he known for? ……………………………………………………………………………………… What led to his three basic laws of motion? ……………………………………………………………………………………… VI Multiple choices (2.0ms): I ……………a letter to my old friend last week A spoke B sends C sent D buy He is………… to ride his bike to school A.not old enough B.old not enough C not enough old D.enough not old He enjoys………… to music while he is studying A listening B listen C listens D to listen A child whose parents have died is called a(n)………………… A neighbor B orphan C nephew D cousin Lan is very shy but her sister is……………… A kind B generous C reserved D outgoing Alexander Graham Bell was born…………March 3, 1847 A on B in C at D during It is dangerous to let children………… in the kitchen A to play B play C playing D to playing The children are not old enough to look after…………… A themselves B their C them D they VII write a description of the living room in your house (1m) …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………… WRITTEN TEST Time: 45 M-(Code 2) Full name: ………………………… Class:8……………… I Listen carefully and circle thecorrect answer in A, B, C or D (1m) Lan is cooking the Chinese fried for her mom A noodles B rice C vegetable s D fish She uses the A small pan B big steamer C big pan D small saucepan 3.She fries the garlic and the A.green peppers B cucumbers C carrots D tomatoes She adds a teapoon of into the rice A flour B pepper C salt D sugar II Multiple choices (2.0ms): I ……………a letter to my old friend last week A spoke B sends C sent D buy He is………… to ride his bike to school A.not old enough B.old not enough C not enough old D.enough not old He enjoys………… to music while he is studying A listening B listen C listens D to listen A child whose parents have died is called a(n)………………… A neighbor B orphan C nephew D cousin Lan is very shy but her sister is……………… A kind B generous C reserved D outgoing Alexander Graham Bell was born…………March 3, 1847 A on B in C at D during It is dangerous to let children………… in the kitchen A to play B play C playing D to playing The children are not old enough to look after…………… A themselves B their C them D they III Choose the words whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others (1m) A fry B Candy C many D happy A knife B Sink C Fire D rice A slim B thin C visit D smile A character B children C Christmas D school IV Choose the underlined word that needs correcting (1m): This Moon cakes isn’t good enough for children to eat A B C D I believe that friends plays an important role in our life A B C D The student ought to learn their lessons careful before the exam A B C D Don’t worry so much The children can looking after themselves A B C D V Read the passage and as direct (2.0ms) Sir Isaac Newton (1642 - 1727) was an English scientist who made great contributions to physics, optics, maths and astronomy He is known for his Three Laws of Motion and the Universal Law of Gravitation When Sir Isaac Newton was a boy, he was more interested in making mechanical devices than in studying He made a windmill which could grind wheat and corn, and he made a water clock and a sundial His teachers thought he was not a very intelligent student because he didn’t very well One day when he was drinking tea in the garden, he saw an apple fall to the ground He started thinking about why it fell Why did the apple fall out of the tree? He finally decided that a force called gravity, which caused the apple to fall also kept the moon in the sky around the earth This same force called gravity, also kept the planets in the sky around the sun The apple incident led to his three basic laws of motion *Check true (T) /false (F): Isaac Newton died in 1727 T Isaac Newton was interested in studying when he was a boy F *Answer the questions: What is he known for? ……………………………………………………………………………………… What led to his three basic laws of motion? ……………………………………………………………………………………… VI Rewrite the following sentences (2ms) Lan is very interested in films and Lan is free tonight (be going to) →……………………………………………………………………………… My sister is old She can drive a car (enough) →……………………………………………………………………………… 3.I feel sick (go to the doctor) (give advice) →……………………………………………………………………………… I went to school late because I played game late last night (make question) →.……………………………………………… ……………………….? VII write a description of the living room in your house (1m) …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… Full name: ………………………… Class: 8…… Written test Mark Time: 45 minutes Teacher’s comment Number I Listen to the passege and filling the missing word (1 pts) You (1)…………….to make sure children not (2)……… ………with matches Each year fire destroys (3)……… ……and injures children because someone plays with matches Remember, it (4)………… takes one match to cause a fire II Circle the best answer A,B,C (2 marks) My friend, Huong didn’t cut her hair by ……………… A myshelf B herself C himself Tuan said you could reach him ………8262019 A at B in C to He ………………………to see a movie A am going B is going C are going My younger sister is …………………… to go to school A.enough B enough to III Put the verbs into the correct forms (2marks) C old enough The moon (move)………………………….around the earth Most rivers (flow)……………………… into the sea They learned(play) …………… the piano when they(be)… years old You ought to (study)………………… harder for your next exam IV.Put the reflexive pronouns (1marks) ( themselves , herself , himself , myself ) 1.They bought a book and taught ………………… to play the violon Last week ,She fell and hurt…………………… I am looking at ………………… in the mirror He can’t that work ……………… V Rewrite the following sentences using the request in bracket (2marks) 1.They are intelligent They can the test (using “ enough to +V… ” ->…………………………………………………………………………… Driving too fast is very dangerous (using It is+ adj+ to ) ->…………………………………………………………………………… Mr Bill is rich He can buy a new house (using “ enough to +V… ” ->…………………………………………………………………………… Nga has a movie ticket (using be +going to) ->…………………………………………………………………………… VI Read the passage carefully, then answer the questions (2marks) Graham Bell was born in Scotland in 1847, but when he was a young man of twenty-three he moved with his parents gone to Canada Before the year was over, young Bell had left his family and to Boston Though Bell was a dream ,he was also a practical thinker and a man of action In Boston ,where he worked by day as a teacher with the deaf-mutes, he worked far into the night experimenting with the electrical transmission of the sound This led to the invention of the telephone Answer True (T) or False(F): 1/ Graham Bell was born in England 2/ He moved to Canada when he was a young of twenty-three 3/ Bell worked with the deaf -mutes in Boston 4/ He experimented with the electrical transmission of the sound into the day The end Full name: ………………………… Written test Class: 8…… Time: 45 minutes Mark Teacher’s comment Number I Listen to the passege and filling the missing word (1 pts) You (1)…………….to make sure children not (2)……… ………with matches Each year fire destroys (3)……… ……and injures children because someone plays with matches Remember, it (4)………… takes one match to cause a fire II Circle the best answer A,B or C (2marks) I didn’t cut my hair by ……………… A myshelf B herself C himself Tuan said you could reach him ………8262019 A to B in C at He is going ………………soccer A play B to play C playing My brother isn’t old enough to school alone A go B goes C to go III Put the verbs into the correct forms (2marks) The sun (rise)……………………… in the East Most rivers (flow)…………………… into the sea She learned(play) …………… the piano when she (be)… years old Nam has to (cook)………….dinner himself IV.Put the reflexive pronouns (1mark) ( themselves , herself , himself , myself ) My sister bought a book and taught ………….to play the violon Last week ,I fell and hurt………… He is looking at …………… in the mirror They can’t that work ……………… V Combine each of the following sentences using “ enough to +V… ”(2marks) Mai is intelligent She can the test (using “ enough to +V… ” ->……………………………………………………………………………………… Nga has a movie ticket (using be +going to) ->……………………………………………………………………………………… He isn’t tall He can not play volleyball (using “ enough to +V… ” ->……………………………………………………………………………………… Driving too fast is very dangerous (using : It is+ adj+ to ) ->…………………………………………………………………………………… VI Read the passage carefully, then answer the questions (2marks) Graham Bell was born in Scotland in 1847, but when he was a young man of twenty-three he moved with his parents gone to Canada Before the year was over, young Bell had left his family and to Boston Though Bell was a dream ,he was also a practical thinker and a man of action In Boston ,where he worked by day as a teacher with the deaf-mutes, he worked far into the night experimenting with the electrical transmission of the sound This led to the invention of the telephone I/Answer True (T) or False(F) 1/ Graham Bell was born in Scotland 2/ He moved to Canada when he was a young of twenty-two 3/ Bell worked with the deaf -mutes in Boston 4/ He worked by day as a doctor of the deaf-mutes The end Teaching Date : 12/10/12 Period 19: Test ( No.1 ) ENGLISH – 45’ A / Objectives: I Teaching points: Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt to the test well II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: II Teaching aids : Papers , chalks and boards B/ Procedure: I Organization: II Contents: Number I Listen to the passege and filling the missing word (1 pts) You (1)…………….to make sure children not (2)……… ………with matches Each year fire destroys (3)……… ……and injures children because someone plays with matches Remember, it (4)………… takes one match to cause a fire II Circle the best answer A,B,C (2 marks) My friend, Huong didn’t cut her hair by ……………… A myshelf B herself C himself Tuan said you could reach him ………8262019 A at B in C to He ………………………to see a movie A am going B is going C are going My younger sister is …………………… to go to school A.enough B enough to C old enough III Put the verbs into the correct forms (2marks) The moon (move)………………………….around the earth Most rivers (flow)……………………… into the sea They learned(play) …………… the piano when they(be)… years old You ought to (study)………………… harder for your next exam IV.Put the reflexive pronouns (1marks) ( themselves , herself , himself , myself ) 1.They bought a book and taught ………………… to play the violon Last week ,She fell and hurt…………………… I am looking at ………………… in the mirror He can’t that work ……………… V Rewrite the following sentences using the request in bracket (2marks) 1.They are intelligent They can the test (using “ enough to +V… ” ->…………………………………………………………………………… Driving too fast is very dangerous (using It is+ adj+ to ) ->…………………………………………………………………………… Mr Bill is rich He can buy a new house (using “ enough to +V… ” ->…………………………………………………………………………… Nga has a movie ticket (using be +going to) ->…………………………………………………………………………… VI Read the passage carefully, then answer the questions (2marks) Graham Bell was born in Scotland in 1847, but when he was a young man of twenty-three he moved with his parents gone to Canada Before the year was over, young Bell had left his family and to Boston Though Bell was a dream ,he was also a practical thinker and a man of action In Boston ,where he worked by day as a teacher with the deaf-mutes, he worked far into the night experimenting with the electrical transmission of the sound This led to the invention of the telephone Answer True (T) or False(F): 1/ Graham Bell was born in England 2/ He moved to Canada when he was a young man of twenty-three 3/ Bell worked with the deaf-mutes in Boston 4/ He experimented with the electrical transmission of the sound into the day Number I Listen to the passege and filling the missing word (1 pts) You (1)…………….to make sure children not (2)……… ………with matches Each year fire destroys (3)……… ……and injures children because someone plays with matches Remember, it (4)………… takes one match to cause a fire II Circle the best answer A,B or C (2marks) I didn’t cut my hair by ……………… A myshelf B herself C himself Tuan said you could reach him ………8262019 A to B in C at He is going ………………soccer A play B to play C playing My brother isn’t old enough to school alone A go B goes C to go III Put the verbs into the correct forms (2marks) The sun (rise)……………………… in the East Most rivers (flow)…………………… into the sea She learned(play) …………… the piano when she (be)… years old Nam has to (cook)………….dinner himself IV.Put the reflexive pronouns (1mark) ( themselves , herself , himself , myself ) My sister bought a book and taught ………….to play the violon Last week ,I fell and hurt………… He is looking at …………… in the mirror They can’t that work ……………… V Combine each of the following sentences using “ enough to +V… ”(2marks) Mai is intelligent She can the test (using “ enough to +V… ” ->……………………………………………………………………………………… Nga has a movie ticket (using be +going to) ->……………………………………………………………………………………… He isn’t tall He can not play volleyball (using “ enough to +V… ” ->……………………………………………………………………………………… Driving too fast is very dangerous (using : It is+ adj+ to ) ->…………………………………………………………………………………… VI Read the passage carefully, then answer the questions (2marks) Graham Bell was born in Scotland in 1847, but when he was a young man of twenty-three he moved with his parents gone to Canada Before the year was over, young Bell had left his family and to Boston Though Bell was a dream ,he was also a practical thinker and a man of action In Boston ,where he worked by day as a teacher with the deaf-mutes, he worked far into the night experimenting with the electrical transmission of the sound This led to the invention of the telephone I/Answer True (T) or False(F) 1/ Graham Bell was born in Scotland 2/ He moved to Canada when he was a young man of twenty-two 3/ Bell worked with the deaf -mutes in Boston 4/ He worked by day as a doctor of the deaf-mute *- Ma trËn: Chủ đề NhËn biÕt I Listening Tæng sè: VËn dông Tæng sè: TN II Reading III Language focus IV Writing Th«ng hiÓu TL 1,0 TN TL TN TL 1,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 12 5,0 4,0 * KEYS I / Listen (1marks) T reads a passage in part read in English 1.have play 3.homes only II / 2.0 (marks) No 1: 1.B A B C No 2: 1,0 1,0 2,0 12 5,0 2,0 24 10 A 2.C 3.B 4.C III / 2,0 (marks) No 1: 1.moves flow to play/ was No 2: rises flow to play/ were IV (marks) No 1: themselves herself myself No 2: herself myself himself V (marks) No 1: They are intelligent enough to this test It is very dangerous to drive too fast Mr Bill is rich enough to buy a new house Nga is going to see a movie No 2: 1.Mai is intelligent enough to this test Nga is going to see a movie He isn’t tall enough to play volleyball It is very dangerous to drive too fast VI (MARKS) No 1: F T 3.T F No 2: T F 3.T F study cook himself themselves Teaching Date : 13 /10/2012 Period 20 TEST REMARK I Objectives By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to remember the old structures and find out their mistakes in the test to corrects II Language contents Grammar: Review the simple present tense with “general truth”, “enough to”, “be going to”, III Techniques: Asking and answering, pair work, chatting IV Teaching aids: textbook, 45 minutes test V Procedures T and Ss’ activities Warm-up ( 3’ ) T: asks Ss to comment the 45 minutes by themselves Ss: comment New lesson a Presentation ( 15’ ) T: asks Ss to retell the simple present tense with “Tobe”, question words, How many ?, This, that Ss: answer T: comments and gives the corrects answer Ss: take note and check their tests b Practice T: asks Ss to base on the structures correcting the test Ss: work in pairs part1 Ss: comment - T: corrects Ss: take note 1S: writes on the board part2 Ss: comment T: corrects their mistakes Ss: take note Contents The simple present tense with general truth S+ V-infi+O Enough to : S + BE + AJD+ ENOUGH TO+ V-infi BE GOING TO S+ be going to+ V- infi * KEYS I / Listen (1marks) T reads a passage in part read in English 1.have play 3.homes only II / 2.0 (marks) No 1: 1.B A B C No 2: A 2.C 3.B 4.C III / 2,0 (marks) No 1: 1.moves flow to play/ was study Ss: ask and answer in pairs part3 Ss: comment 1S: writes on the board T: gives the corrects answers Ss: take note Ss: discuss in pairs part4 1S: writes the complete sentence on the board Ss: comment T: gives the corrects answer Ss: take note Consolidation ( 3’ ) T: asks some questions ( ask Ss close their books and the test ) Ss: answer T: reviews the main points and asks Ss to learn the lesson carefully for the next test Ss: listen and remember Homework ( 1’ ) T: asks Ss to: Ss: listen and take note No 2: rises flow to play/ were cook IV (marks) No 1: themselves herself myself himself No 2: herself myself himself themselves V (marks) No 1: They are intelligent enough to this test It is very dangerous to drive too fast Mr Bill is rich enough to buy a new house Nga is going to see a movie No 2: Nga is going to see a movie Mai is intelligent enough to this test Nga is going to see a movie He isn’t tall enough to play volleyball It is very dangerous to drive too fast VI (MARKS) No 1: F T 3.T F No 2: T F 3.T F - Write the complete test - Learn by heart the structures again Preparing date: 09/ 10/ 2015 Teaching Date : 10 /10/2015 Period 21 Unit 4: Our past Lesson : Getting started &Listen and read A Objectives: I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to tell the activities people used to in the past II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: III Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , chalks, leson plan, picture B/ Procedure: I Organization : - Greeting II Checking up : - Asks Ssretell some structures grammar of last lesson - T corrects and give them marks III New lesson : Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up : * Getting started - Ask Ss to look at the picture and write the names of the things that not belong to the past * Answers : Play game in two teams - The TV / The radio / The mobile / The light fixture -One by one go to the board - Modern clothing / school uniforms Pre - reading : Pre- teach vocabulary - used to + v : đã ( trans…) - to look after = to take care of - (an)Equipment (n) Trang thiÕt bi - example Listen and repeat in chorus , - a folktale : Tam Cam is a folk tale : chuyÖn dan gian individually - (a) tale: chuyÖn cæ tÝch Guess its meanings and copy ( explain ) - Traditional ( adj ) thuéc vÒ truyÒn thèng (trans ) down Play game -( a) great grandfa / great grandma(n)cô «ng / cô bµ - Lost : (v) / Lit(v) thắp , đốt ( đèn) ( explain) * Checking : What and where T / F statements prediction - Ask Ss to read the statements and predict they are true or false Statements Guess Key Nga is used to live on farm F , Nga s grandma did not go to T school She has an easy and happy life F when she was young There was not any modern T equipment at her time F “ The lost shoe “ is a short story - Call on Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board While - reading : - Turn on the tape times and look at their books to read the dialogue between Nga and her Grandma to check their predictions - Ask them to correct the false statements Grandma used to love on farm She had a hard life It is an old folk tale * Comprehension : - Get Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering questions - Give feedback a She used to live on a farm b Because she had to stay at home and help her Mom to look after her younger brothers and sisters c She used to cook the meals , clean the house and wash the clothes d Her great grandma used to lit the lamp and her great father used to tell stories e.She asked her grandma to tell her the tale“The lost shoe“ - Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the questions * Fact or opinion - Have Ss read the statements part and decide which is a fact and which is a pinion Statements Fact Opinion a I used to live on a farm X b There was not any electricity X c Mom had to everything X without the help of modern equipment X d My father used to tell us stories X e The best one was the lost shoe X Work in groups - read the statements and predict -Read their predictions Listen to the tape and look at their books to check their predictions - Correct the false ones - work in pairs Practice asking and answering the questions Read the statements and decide which is a fact and which is a opinion - Practice in groups Demonstrate in front of class Listen and copy - Retell the main points - Copy down home works f Traditional stories are great - Give feedback Post - reading : * Survey Did you use to ? Name Get up late / Ride bicycle too fast Go to school / Eat too much candy Forget to your homework - Give feedback by asking Ss some questions to check “ Who used to get up late / ride bicycle too fast ? “ - Write it down Consolidation: Retell the main points Homework : Write the result of their survey Learn by heart new words Prepare the next lesson Preparing date: 12/ 10/ 2015 Teaching Date : 13 /10/2015 Period 22 Unit 4: Lesson : Speak & Language focus A / Objectives: I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use USED TO to talk about the things they used to II Language contents: Vocabulary: some objects Grammar: Used to III.Teaching aids : Textbooks , word cards for drilling, lesson plan, poster B/ Procedure: I Organization: - Greeting and ask some questions II Checking up: - Ask Ss to stand up and retell new words of last lesson.( say about the meaning, form.) - Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lesson : Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities Warm up : Jumbled words - rieletcicty = Electricity - menttaenterin = Entertainment Play games - rkmaet = Market - permasuekt = Supermarket - One by one to go to the board to Pre - speaking : write  Recall the conversation between Nga and her grandma , then ask “ Where did Nga,s grandma always live ? “ -> She always lived on a farm - Ask : “ Another word for always lived “ Ask Ss to use Used to to make question and answer “ Where did Nga ,s grandma use to live ? “ Practice reading the conversation She used to live on a farm and answer the questions  Form : S + Used to + inf S + did not use to + inf Did + S + use to + inf ?  Expressing a past habit , or an action usually Listen and copy happened in the past  Practice Word cue drill - Practise in pairs a Live / Hue / Hanoi b Have / long hairs / short hairs c Get up / late / early d Walk to school / bicycle e Study / evening / early morning Practice speaking with cues - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the cues above While - speaking : - Get Ss to work in closed pairs , then open pairs - Ask them to compare pictures , using “ USED TO “ to talk about the actions in the past , using these ideas below : Where did they live in the past ? And now ? How did they travel ? What is about the electricity ? What is about their life / work ? Did children use to go to school ? What is about their entertainment ? - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class - Give feedback * Suggested answers : People used to live in small houses Now they live in big houses and buildings People used to walk Now they can go by cars or motorbikes Now , there is electricity everywhere People used to work hard all the time Now they have a lot of time for entertainment Most children used to stay at home Now , they all go to school Children used to play traditional games such as hide and seek , skip rope outdoors Now , they have a lot of modern games – video games Post - speaking : * Write it up - Ask Them to write a complete writing about the difference of the life in the past and now - Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class - Correct common mistakes Consolidation: Retell the main points of this lesson Homework : Write about the things you used to last year Beginning : Last year , I used to get up late Now , I get up very early and morning exercises “ Do exercise in workbook Prepare the next lesson Work in pairs Demonstrate in front of class - One by one - copy down if necessary Work individually - Retell the main points Listen and copy Preparing date: 15/ 10/ 2015 Teaching Date : 16 /10/2015 Period 23 A / Objectives: Unit 4: Lesson 3: Listen & L F 1,2 I Teaching points :.By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the main idea of a story by listening Develop’s listening skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: Some words of the a tale Grammar: The past tense and prepositions of time III.Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , chalk , board ,lesson plan B/ Procedure: I Organization: II Checking up : Asks sme Ss to stand up and say about the new word of last lesson T corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Student’s ,activities I / Warm up : Pelmanism Play game run ran fly flew ride rode eat ate sit sat come came - Continue until all the cards are finished Listen and copy A/ listening: Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the listening Listen and repeat in chorus , individually task Pre – teach vocabulary : Copy down - Foolish (a) = ngớ ngÈn , ngèc nghiÕch - greedy ( a) = tham lam Play game - Gold (n) ( realia ) - to lay -> laid – laid ( Picture ) - amazement (n) = ng¹c nhiªn , vui nhén Work in groups to predict * Checking : What and where Read their predictions Prediction : aloud - Ask Ss to predict the moral lesson of the story - Have them look at four titles and guess which is the most suitable to the story - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write Listen to the tape and check their predictions them on the board While - listening : Read their results and write down Checking the prediction - Turn on the tape twice and ask them to fill the suitable word in the blanks and check their predictions Once a (1)…… … lived a comfortable life with his family His (2)……… laid many eggs which the farmer used to buy food and clothing for his family Listen and fill in One day, he went to collect the eggs and discovered one of the chickens laid a (3)……… egg He shouted excitedly to his wife, “We’re rich! We’re rich!”His wife ran to him and they both looked at the egg in amazement The wife wanted more, so her husband decided to (4)……… all the chickens and find more gold eggs Unfortunately, he couldn’t find any eggs When he finished all, the chickens were (5)……… There were no more eggs of any kind for the (6)…….farmer and his (7)……wife - Turn on the tape once more to check their results again Find out the verbs in the story : - Ask Ss what tense is used in the story ( Simple past tense ) - Have Ss listen again and try to write as many verbs as possible The student who writes more verbs get good marks - Call on some Ss to read the verbs aloud - Give feedback: went / discovered / laid / shouted / finished / could not / were / ran / looked / wanted / decided - Ask Ss to give the infinitives of these verbs Multiple choice What moral lesson we have from the story? a Don’t kill chickens b Don’t be foolish and greedy c Be happy with what you have d It’s difficult to find gold Post - listening : Chatting : 1.Do you think the farmer and his wife were happy? What happened with his chickens? Did they find more gold eggs? What were they like? Foolish or greedy? - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class - Correct and give feedback B/ The presitions of time: Ask Ss to read information in the book and show the use of the prepositions - T listen, checks and asks Ss to copy - Practives:  Do exercise p 44 - T suggests Ss doing exercise Consolidations: - Retell the mains points.( some Ss to retell ) V / Homework : Copy the completed dialogue in their notebooks Do exercises in workbook Prepare the next lesson Listen and find out the verbs in the tape Read them aloud Give the infinitives of these verbs Practice in pairs Listen and copy Ss read information in the book and show the use of the informations answer key: - in + tháng, năm - on + ngày tháng , năm - At + - After + - Befor + - Between… + and + hai - Ss copy - Ss listen carefully and Practice in pairs Ss copy down Preparing date: 16/ 10/ 2015 Teaching Date : 17 /10/2015 Period 24 Unit 4:Lesson : Read A/ Objectives: I Teaching points :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand and retell the story The lost shoe II Teaching aids : Text book , word cards for drilling , cassette ,lesson plan and picture III Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: B/ Procedures: I Organization: Greeting II Checking up: -Retell the Story “ Don’t be foolish and greedy” - T corrects and give them marks III New lesson: T’ activities * Warm up : * Brainstorming Name some folks tales that you have read  Possible answers : - Cây tre trăm đốt ( one hundred-section bamboo ) - TÊm c¸m / Hoµng tö Cãc ( The frog Prince ) - §«i hµi dÆm ( Seven – mile shoes ) - B¹ch tuyÕt vµ b¶y chó lïn ( Snow white and dwarfs ) Ss’ activities Play games in two teams folktales Copy some names of the stories in English I / Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss Pre – teach vocabulary : - cruel (a) = độc ác , ác nghiệt - upset (a) = worried - fairy (n) = truþÖn cæ tÝch - magical (a) -> magically (adv) - rag (n) ( realia ) - to fall in love with = yªu - immediately (adv ) = lËp tøc * Checking : R& R T / F statements predictions - Ask Ss to work in groups to predict Statements Guess Key , Little Pea s father is poor T farmer Her father got married again T after his wife died Her new mother was beautiful F and nice to her She worked hard all day T She did not have new clothes F to take part in the festival - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board II / While - reading : Checking the predictions : - Turn on the tape times and ask them to look at their text books to check their predictions and correct the false ones Listen and copy Listen and repeat in chorus , individually Guess its meanings and copy - Works in pairs Play games Work in groups - Sentence : Her new mother was cruel to her - Sentence : A fairy gave her beautiful clothes - Call on Ss to read the story – Correct mistakes if any Comprehension questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs answering the questions - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering - Listen and give feedback a She was a poor farmer ,s daughter b She made her the chores all day c Before the festival started , a fairy appeared and magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes d He decided to marry Little Pea because the shoe fitted her e Ss answer themselves - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class Gap filling : Complete the sentences with words from the story - Ask Ss to work in pairs , filling the blanks with suitable words from the story - Call on some Ss to read their complete sentences aloud - Give feedback a farmer b died c used d marry / choose e clothes f lost III / Post - reading : *Retell the story - Have Ss work in pairs , telling the story again in details ( They can look at the statements in the gap filling exercise and add more ) - Call on some Ss to retell the story in front of class - Correct mistakes if any Consolidations: - Retell the mains points Homework : Rewrite the story Do exercises in workbook Prepare the next lesson Read their predictions Listen and check their predictions Read their results and correct the false ones Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions Work in pairs to complete the sentences Read their complete sentences Listen and copy Work in pairs to retell the story in details Demonstrate in front of class Listen and copy - Ss copy down * Feedback Preparing date: 19/ 10/ 2015 Teaching Date : 20 /10/2015 Period 25 Unit 4: Lesson : Write & Language focus A/ Objectives: I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use Simple Past Tense to write a folk tale II Teaching aids : Text book , eleven cards , chalks , boards ,lesson plan III Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: Past simple tense B/ Procedure: I Organization: - Greeting II Checking up:- Retell the story “the foolish famer and greedy wife” - Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lesson: T’ activities Ss’ activities Warm up : * Chatting - Ask Ss some questions about imaginary stories Do you want to read imaginary stories ? Name some of them Play game Which story you like best ? Have you ever read the story “ how the tigers got his stripes “ ? Pre - writing : Introduce the aims of the writing and some new words Pre- teach vocabulary : - wisdom ( n) : trÝ kh«n - a stripe (n) ( realia ) - a straw ( n) ( realia ) - a servant (n) : ngêi phôc vô , ®Çy tí - to graze ( picture ) - to escape : trèn tho¸t - to light – lit – lighted ( mime ) * Checking : Matching A B wisdom a trèn tho¸t a stripe b đờng sọc a straw c ¨n cá , gÆm cá a servant d trÝ kh«n graze e r¬m r¹ escape f ®Çy tí - Ask Ss to come to the board to match items on the left with those on the right by drawing a line connecting the story * Reading : - Ask Ss to read and complete the story - Call on Ss to say the meanings of the verbs in the box - Have them work in pairs , using suitable verbs to fill in the blanks - Call on them to read their answers aloud - Give feedback appear as said left went lit burned escaped + Comprehension questions : - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions above While - writing : - Get Ss to exercise ( Ss have to imagine to be a man in order to write the story ) + Notice : Change The man -> I / His -> My - Ask Ss to work individually , then share with their partners and correct mistakes - Take some writings to correct in front of the class - Give suggested answers : Post - writing : * Telling the story - Divide the class into teams Team A plays the role of the tiger Team B plays the role of the Listen and copy Listen and repeat in chorus , individually Guess its meanings and copy Work individually Read the verbs in the box and say the meanings of them Read the complete story Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions where was the man ? What did the buffalo when the tiger appeared ? What did the tiger want to know ? What did he before going home ? Why ? What did he when he returned ? buffalo - Ask them to work in team , telling the story Notice : - Team tiger changes : a / the tiger -> I - Team buffalo changes : a / the buffalo - > I Consolidation: - Retell the main points - LF3 page44 - Ask students to exercise on page 44 individually then compare with their partners - Give feedback Homework : Write the story again , imagine you are : * The tiger * The buffalo Do exercises in workbook Prepare the next lesson Write the story individually Demonstrate in front of class Play the roles of tiger and buffalo , telling the story Listen and copy Gap filling a I'll see you on Wednesday b I'm going to Laos in January c We must be there between 8.30 and 9.15 d The bank closes at p.m if you arrive after 3p.m., the bank will be closed e I'll be home before seven because I want to see the seven o'clock news Ss copy down * Feedback Preparing date: 22/ 10/ 2015 Teaching Date : 23 /10/2015 Unit : Study habits Period 26 Lesson 1: Getting started & Listen and read A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue between Jim and his Mom about his study II Teaching aids : Text books , cassette , chalks,CD, lesson plan III Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: Adverbs of manner, madal verbs, should, commands B/ Procedure: Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance Checking up:Asks Ss to retell the mains structure grammar.T corrects and give them marks Warm up : ** Net work - Ask Ss to write as many subjects as they can on the subjects at school blackboard Work in groups to play games * Possible answers : Chemistry / Physics / maths / geography / literature / history Read the answers aloud - Lead in the new lesson by Chatting Pre - reading : - What subjects are you good at ? / bad at ? - What subject you like best ? / Why ? Chat the questions How often you have maths ? / Literature ? Pre- teach vocabulary : - a report card ( realia ): phiÕu b¸o ®iÓm - pronunciation ( mime ) (n) c¸ch ph¸t ©m, ng÷ ©m -(to)improve ( situation ):c¶i thiÖn ,trau dåi -(to)be proud of = tù hµo - (to) promise: høa - to try one,s best = cè g¾ng hÕt søc * Checking : Rub out and remember * / F statements predictions : - Ask Ss to read the statements and predict they are true or false Statements Guess Key Tim was out when his mother F called him Tim,s mother met his teacher at F school Tim,s report is poor F Tim needs to improve his Spanish T grammar Tim promised to try his best in T learning Spanish - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board While - reading : - Turn on the tape and ask Ss to look at their books , then read the dialogue to check their predictions - Call on some Ss to read their results - Give feedback : - Ask Ss to correct false statements Tim was in the living room / at home his report is excellent He needs to improve his Spanish pronunciation - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of class - Listen and correct their pronunciation if any * Comprehension questions : - Ask Ss to work in pairs , answering the questions - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions - Give feedback - Ask them to practice in open pairs Post - reading : Survey - Ask Ss to work in groups by standing to ask each other the question “ What subject you need to improve ? “ and they have to write the names and the - Listen and repeat in chorus , individually Copy down Play game Work individually Read their predictions aloud Listen and read the dialogue to check their predictions Correct false ones Read them aloud Practice the dialogue in pairs Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions Open pairs Practice in open pairs a She is Tim,s teacher b She gave Tim,s mother his report card c He worked really hard d She said Tim should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation e She gave him a dictionary - Asks each other: What subjects you need to improve ? subjects that their friends answer : Name What subject Lan History ………… ……… - Ask Ss who need to improve the same subjects work in group and discuss how to improve Homework : Write the way how to improve the subject that they are not good at Prepare the next lesson * Feedback Work in groups Listen and copy -Copy down homeworks Preparing date: 23/ 10/ 2015 Teaching Date : 24 /10/2015 Period 27 Unit Lesson 2: Speak and Listen A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about their study habits - Develop Ss’ speaking skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: Behavior, cooperation, satisfactory ≠ unsatisfactory, comment., signature Grammar: Conditional sentence III Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD B/ Procedure: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up : - Asks Ss retell sme mains subjects at school - Some pairs ask and answer about their subjects S1: How often we have music ? S2: We have music 2times aweek => T corrects and give them marks III New lesson : T’ activities Ss’ activities Warm up : *Brainstorming - Ask Ss to write their ideas on the blackboard * Possible answers : - Speak English to friends in class - Watch English TV - Do grammar exercises - Read English stories - Read English newspapers / magazines - Listen to the English radio program Work in groups to play games Read all the ways of improving English How Howtotoimprove improveyour yourEnglish English?? Copy in their notebooks *Speaking: Pre - speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking - Call on some Ss to read the possible answers above and copy down - Have Ss read the questions and words in the boxes While – speaking : - Asks Ss work in groups of three or four in the tables Ask each other about your studies.Use the questions and words in the boxes to help them When you your homework? ( after school / after dinner / late at night / … ) Who helps you with your homework? ( your parents / your brother / your sisters / a friend …) … - Asks Ss exercises in the text books in page 48 - T gets feedback Call some pairs to talk loudly - Others listening * Model : Lan said she did her homework after dinner He / she said ……… - Call on some pairs to read the model - Ask Ss to work in pairs - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class - Correct mistakes if any Post - speaking : - Ask Ss to write with information above Eg : Lan ,s elder brother helps him with his homework - Call on some Ss to read their writings *B/ Listening: Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words : Listen and read the model , then copy Work in pairs Practice in front of class Work individually Read their writings - Ss works in pairs - copy down some keys if necessary Write with these informations - Some pairs to practise - Retell the main poi Retell individually Listen and copy Listen and repeat in chorus and individually Pre – teach vocabulary : - behavior (n) = c¸ch øng xö, hµnh vi (trans ) - participant (n) = nguêi tham gia, sù tham gia - Satisfactory >< unsatisfactory (adj) tháa m¶n, hµi lßng, to¹i nguyÖn > < ko tháa m¶n,… - cooperation (n) = sù hîp t¸c - attendance (n) = đủ, số ngời có mặt, - (to)appreciate = đánh gía cao ,cảm kích, hiểu rỏ gÝa tri While - listening : Listen : - Get Ss to listen to the tape and check their prediction - Call on Ss to read their results and give feedback 87 days present days absent participation : Spanish pronunciation Listening : Comprehension Speaking : A Reading : A Writing : B Comprehension questions : - Ask Ss to answer some questions about Nga,s report card Who are Nga,s parents ? What is Nga,s teacher,s name ? What subject was reported ? For what term ? What are the comments ? What does S stand for ? What about F UA B CD ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and work in pairs to answer the questions - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class - Give feedback Post - listening : ** Survey: Questions You ur partner When you your homework ? Who helps you with your homework? How much time you spend on Maths / English / History / Literature ? Which subject you need to improve ? What you to improve Copy down Play game Predict and compare with their partners Report their predictions Listen to the tape and check their predictions Read their results Work in pairs tom practice asking and answering the questions Practice asking and answering the questions and report their survey your English? - Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking their partners questions and taking notes of the answers - Ask Ss to work in groups of 0r to report what they have known about their partners, study - Correct mistakes if any Do exercises LF , Works in pairs - Do EX (52) Work in groups of tables Consolidation: -Retell the mains points of this lesson ( Some Ss to retell) Homework : Copy the effective ways of learning English they have found out Do exercises in workbook Prepare the next lesson * Feedback Copy down homeworks - - Preparing date: 26/ 10/ 2015 Teaching Date : 27 /10/2015 Period 28 Unit : Lesson 3: Read I Objectives: * Teaching points : Ss will understand the dialogue between Jim and his Mom about his study II Language contents: Vocabulary: mother tongue , instead, underline, highlight, stick Brainstorming, Gussing, survey Skill : Reading III Teaching aids : Text books , cards , cassette , chalk ,poster IV; Procedures: * Organizations (2’) Greeting and checking attendance Teacher’s Activities Warm up *Chatting: +Do you like learning English? +How many new words you try to learn a day? +What you when you read a new word? +How you learn/ remember new words? Pre-reading 1.Pre-teach vocabulary mother tongue (n): tiếng mẹ đẻ instead : thay v× learn by heart : häc thuéc lßng underline (v): g¹ch ch©n highlight (v) : lµm næi bËt come across (v) : t×nh cê gÆp stick (v) : d¸n revise (v) «n tËp revision (n) sù «n tËp *Checking : Matching 3.T / F statements prediction a All language leaners write the meaning of new words in their mother tongue b Some leaners write examples of words they want to learn c Every leaner tries tolearn all newords they comes across d Many leaners only learn newords that are important While-reading -Ask Ss to read the text and correct: -Answers: a-F b- T c- F d- T Post-reading: Answer these questions a Do learners learn words in the same way? b Why some learners write example sentences with new words? c What some learners learn all the new words they come across? d What is necessary in learning words? e How should you learn words? Homework Learn by heart vocb Ss’Activities T – whole class Teacher - whole class Group work - Answer the True or False in groups - give feedback - Practise asking and answering the questions Do exercises in work book * Feedback Preparing date: 29/ 10/ 2015 Teaching Date : 30 /10/2015 Period 29 Unit 5: Lesson 4: Read I.Objective: Ss will understand the text and get specific information II.Content : vocabulary : Techniques : Brainstorming, Guessing,survey Skill : Reading III Teaching aids: textbook, tape, cassette IV Teaching procedure : Students, activities Teacher’s activities T – whole class Warm up Brainstorming - Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of the ways how a language learner can learn new words Ways language learners learn new words Whole class Group work Pre-reading * Possible answers : - Learn by heart - Translate it into mother tongue - Write each word on one piece of paper and put it into the pocket to learn whenever Individual work - Learn through example sentences Pair work - Write it on small piece of paper and stick everywhere in the house …… Teacher - whole class While-reading Exercise Comprihension questions -Have Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions a no they learn woeds in different ways b Because they help them to rememb erthe use of the word c they write examples,put the words and their meanings on stickers ,underline or highlight them d They may think they can't so.Instead,they learn important words e revision is necessary in learning words f learners should try different ways of learning words to fin d out what is the best Post-reading  Survey - Ask Ss to work in groups to interview one another and tick the ways they have used to learn new words Ways of learning words Lan Hoa Make a list of words , their meanings and learn them by heart Write sample sentences with new words Stick new words somewhere in the house Underline or highlight the words Read stories in English Learn words through songs Work in groups Copy down - Call on Ss to report about their groups Ex : Lan learns words by making a list of words Homework Write the ways of learning words that you think are the best for you Prepare the next lesson * Feedback Preparing date: 30/ 10/ 2015 Teaching Date : 31 /10/2015 Period 30 Unit Lesson : Write A/ Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know the format of a friendly letter and practice writing a letter to a friend II Teaching aids : Textbook , chalks , boards,lesson plan, posters … III Language contents: Vocabulary: heading, opening, closing, lunar new year Grammar: request in repoted speech B/ Procedure: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: -Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the new words and meaning of these words Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Warm up : Chatting Have you ever written to someone ? To whom you usually write ? What you often write about ? - Lead in new lesson Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words to Ss Pre – teach vocabulary : - Lunar New Year Festival ( explanation )Tết âm lịch - Enjoyable (adj ) = vui thú , thích thú, vui thích - (to) celebrate = kỉ niệm , tổ chức , kỉ niệm -> celebration (n) lể kỉ niệm Students,activities Play games Listen and copy down Listen and repeat in chorus , individually Copy down Play games - Mid-Autumn Festival(n) Tết trung thu - Moon festival( n) : lể hội mừng trăng * Checking : Rub out and remember Ordering: - Ask Ss to put the parts of the letter in the correct order - Give feedback 1-f 2-c 3-a 4-d 5-b 6-e - Ask Ss to read the letter to check their order Labeling - Ask Ss to label each section with the correct letter Comprehension questions - Have Ss work in pairs and answer some questions a Who wrote the letter ? To whom ? b What are there in the heading ? c What is the main part of the letter ? d What did Hoa receive a few days ago ? e What subject is Hoa good at ? f Where is she going to celebrate the Lunar New Year Festival ? - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of class While - writing : - Ask Ss to imagine that they are Lan and write a letter to her pen pal Donna in San Francisco , using the given information - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their writings in front of class * Suggested letter : 15 Quang Trung street Hanoi , July 12 th , 2005 Dear Donna Thanks for your letter I am glad to hear you had an interesting Mother,s Day We have received our second semester report last month I got good grades for Geography , Physics and Math but my English and History results were poor My teacher advises me to improve English and History I think I have to study harder next school year In a few weeks , we are going to celebrate the mid Autumn festival That is an Autumn moon festival in Vietnam This afternoon , I am going to Ha Long Bay with my aunt and uncle by bus and I am going to stay ther with them until the festival comes I will send you a postcard from there Write soon and tell me all your news Do the exercise individually Read and check a Opening letter b Closing c The date address d Body of the e Signature f Writer,s Label each section with the correct letter Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions Imagine and write the a letter individually - Share with their partners Best Lan , Post - writing : Correction - Call on Ss to read aloud their letters and correct the mistakes Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson Homeworks : Write a letter to your friend to tell him / her about your second semester report and about Summer holiday Learn by heart vocabulary and mains structure grammar Redo all exercises of language focus Prepare for next lesson * Feedback Read their letters aloud Copy down - Retell the mains points of this lesson - Copy dowm homeworks Preparing date: 02/ 11/ 2015 Teaching Date : 03 /11/2015 Period 31 Unit: Lesson : Language focus A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use adverb of manner, exercises language focus 1+ in page 52 in Ss’s books II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar:adverbs of manner, should, commands, request, advice in reported speech III.Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , lesson plan, posters B/ Procedure: I Organizations : - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up : - Asks Ss retell the new words of last lesson - T corrects and give them marks III New lesson : Teacher’s activities Students,activities Warm up : * Retelling - Ask Ss to write the adverbs of manner: - Ss write; - Good - bad - quick - well - badly - quikly - Soft - fast - early - softly - fast - early - Hard - beautiful - careful - hard - beautifully  Revision - carefully A Adverbs of manner: ? Ask Ss to repeat the use, form of adverbs of - Ss repeat: manner * Use : To express actions - T listens and emphazises happened and finished in the B Should past ? ask Ss to repeat the use, form of Should * Form: Adj + ly = Adv - T listens and emphazises - Ss repeat: Modal : Should * Use: To express advice -> Explain the modal “ Should “ * Form: ( + ) S + should + V + Form : S + Should + infinitive ( - ) S + shouldn’t + V + Use : give advice ( ? ) Should + S + V ? + Meaning : nªn ( lµm g× ) Ss listen carefully and copy the Language focus form Complete the dialoguge: - T hangs a poster - Do exercise; Asks Ss to exercises in pairs Requests in reported speech Let Ss roplay of Tim, Tim’s mother and miss Report their predictions Jackson to request and report request  Form: S + asked/ told + O + to V  Advice in reported speech - Let Ss roplay of Tim, Tim’s mother and miss Jackson to give advice and report advice  form: S + said + Clause ( should) - T checks after Ss finish *T corrects mistakes and remarks *T call Ss to go to the board to exercises LF and then T corrects mistakes and remarks Consolidation: - Retell the mains points of this lesson Homework : Write something about your partners, study habits Eg : Lan is my best friend She works very hard and always get good grades she usually does her homework after school Work in pairs tom practice asking and answering the questions Practice asking and answering the questions and report their survey - Do exercises LF , Works in pairs - Do exercises LF **Ex (:4 / 53) - Ask Ss to work with their partners - Call on some Ss to practice in pairs and correct pronunciation - Give feedback a Miss Jackson said you should spend more time on Spanish pronunciation b Miss Jackson said you should practice speaking Spanish every day c Miss Jackson said you should listen to Spanish conversation on TV d Miss Jackson you should practice reading aloud passage in Spanish e Miss Jackson said you should use this dictionary to find out how to pronounce Spanish words Copy down * Feedback Preparing date: 05/ 11/ 2015 Teaching Date : 06 /11/2015 Unit Period 32 The young pioneers club Lesson : Listen and read + L.f A /Objectives: I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the dialogue about the young pioneers Ss Will be able to use the simple present tense with future meaning II Language contents: Vocabulary: - Some words of this period Grammar; - The present simple with future meaning - Gerunds - Modals: may, can, could III.Teaching aids : Textbook , cards for drill , Cassette, posters, lesson plan B/ Procedure: I Organization: Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up:Asks Ss to retell the new words and their meaning - Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lwesson : Teacher’s activities Students,activities * Warm up : * Chatting Ask Ss some questions about their activities and their summer holidays Chatting What you often on your summer holiday ? ( whole class ) Are you members of the Young Pioneers and Youth Organization ? Are there any activity programs for the summer ? Do you take part in them ? What activity you like most ? Presentation : Introduce the topic of the lesson and some new words to Ss Pre – teach vocabulary : Listen and repeat in -( to ) enroll ( translation ) :Đăng kí vào., ghi danh chorus and individually , - Answer application form ( visual ) then copy - Out door activities : Games that you play in the open air rather than in a building or a house such as : football , tennis … - Hobby (n) (Revision) - Acting (n) (revision) Play game * Checking :* Rub out and remember Listen and read the dialogue : Listen to the tape - Set the scene “ Nga is a student in grade eight She wants to enroll in the activities for the summer “ Read the dialogue - Ask Ss to listen and read the dialogue at the same time - Get Ss to work in pairs and complete Nga,s particulars - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of class Work in pairs - Give feedback * Name : Pham Thi Nga * Home address : Tran Phu Street * Phone number : Not available * Date of birth : April 22 , 1989 * Sex : Female * Interest : Drawing , outdoor , activities , acting - Ask Ss some questions : + What is her name ? + What does she live ? + When was she born ? + What are her hobbies ? - Call on some Ss to answer the questions Concept checking - What is after “ likes “ ? -> drawing - What is after “ enjoys “ ? -> acting - What you call “ drawing “ and “ acting “ -> gerund - What is the form of “ gerund “ ? -> V- ing - When we use “ gerund “ ? - > after some verbs : like , love , enjoy , hate , mind * Form Like , love , enjoy , hate + gerund * Drill : word cue drill - Prepare cards with these cues on them : a play soccer / volley ball b watch TV / listen to music c read books / homework d Chat with friends / the housework e Cook meal / decorate the house => What are your hobbies ? I like / love playing soccer and volleyball - Call on Ss to practice asking and answering - Correct mistakes if any - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue Production * Survey (Language focus 2) - Ask Ss to copy down the chart and work in groups of three to ask their friends and tick on the chart Do you like name / Nam Mai , love like don t love like don,t hate like hate like - play soccer - washing up - cooking meals - performing music - gathering broken glasses - watching TV Report their results in front of class Answer the questions ( whole class ) Listen and copy the form Then practice Practice reading the dialogue in pairs Work in groups -Ss Retell the main points - play badminton - Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends, hobbies Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson Homework : Write about their friend,s hobbies - Learn vocabulary, main structure Grammar by heart Prepare the next lesson * Feedback Listen and copy - Copy down homeworks Preparing date: 06/ 11/ 2015 Teaching Date : 07 /11/2015 Period: 33 UNIT : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB LESSON 02: SPEAK + LANGUAGE FOCUS I Aim Practicing asking for favors II Objective By the end of the lesson, S will be able to ask for favors and respond to favors III Teaching aids - Extra board - Textbook IV Procedure Content 1.Warm up Play game : Shark’s attack Presentation * Meaning of “favor” - favor (n) : ân huệ + Can / Could you help me ? + Could you me a favor ? + Can / Could you + ? - Need some help - Certainly / Of course / sure / No problem Asking for favors (yêu cầu giúp đỡ ) - Can / Could you help me , please ? - Could you me a favor ? - I need a favor ? - Can / Could you please ? Offering assistance (đề nghị giúp ) - May I help you ? - Do you need any help ? - Let me help you Practice * Language focus * a Asking for favors (yêu cầu giúp đỡ ) A Buy a ticket for me B Take me a cross the road C Help me with this math problem D Water the flowers in the garden * b Offering assistance (đề nghị giúp ) A May I B Do you need any help C Me help you D Very kind T and S’ activities S : Answer - What you say to ask for a favor ? - When ou ask for favor ? - How you say to respond to favor ? Responding to favor - Certainly/ Of course/ sure/ - No problem - What can I for you ? - How can I help you ? I’m sorry I’m really busy/ I can’t Responding to assistance - Yes/ No Thank you - Yes, That’s very kind of you - No Thank you I’m fine S : Work in pairs to ex L3 T : Calls on some pairs to practice S : Work in pairs T : Set the scene S : Make a dialogue between Mrs Ngoc and Hoa S : Work in pairs to make dialogue T : Calls on some pairs to practice speaking Production Ex : S1 : Could you me a favor, please ? S2 : Sure What can I for you ? S1 : Can you help me tidy the yard ? I’ve a broken leg S2 : Of course I’ll help you S1 : Thank you very much That’s very kind of you Homework Ex : 1, * Feedback Preparing date: 09/ 11/ 2015 Teaching Date : 10 /11/2015 Period: 34 UNIT 06 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB LESSON 03: GETTING STARTED &LISTEN + L F1 I Aim Listening for details and Practicing speaking when offering assistance II Objective By the end of the lesson, S will be able to complete a song and offer and respond to assistance III Teaching aids - Extra board - Textbook IV Procedure Content 1.Warm up * Chatting -Are you members of young pioneers and youth organization? _Are there any activities programs for school? _Do you take part in them? _What activity you like most? Pre-listening a Vocab - unite (v): đoàn kết - peace(n): hòa bình - hold (v): cầm, nắm b Guess the missing words you you you you guess hear guess hear unite of peace world right show love 10 place north 11 out south 12 stand 13 world While-listening * The song : Children of our land unite Let’s sing for peace Let’s sing for right Let’s sing for the love between North and South Oh, children of our land , unite Language focus * Meaning Thì đơn mang ý nghĩa TL dùng để nói thời gian biểu, chương trình (phương tiện gđ, rạp chiếu phim ) kế hoạch xếp thời gian biểu T and S’ activities T : Ask S some questions about theirsactivities and their summer holidays S: Work with a partner Ask and answer questions about Y& Y Spring activity program -SS: use : when Where What time ex : - Smoking is bad for your health - My hobby is drawing Children love reading fairy tales * Practice a Collect and empty garbage / DX market b Plant / water strees / park c Help elderly people / march 26 d Clean up the streets / june e Water trees and flowers / a.m – a.m f Take part in sports / next Sunday Ex1 : Cho dạng đúng ĐT ngoặc Stop (argue) and start (work) I like (think) carefully about things before (make) a decision Ask him (come) in Don’t keep him (stand) at door Don’t forget (lock) the door before (go) to bed Don’t try (persuade) me Nothing can make me (change) my mind Homework Ex : 5,6,7 Ex : She cares for feeding the chicken - I’m sorry for being late - arguing/ to work - thinking/making - to come / standing - to lock / going - to persuade/ change * Feedback Preparing date: 12/ 11/ 2015 Teaching Date : 13 /11/2015 Period 35 Unit Lesson : Read A/ Objectives: I-Teaching points :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know more about Ho Chi Minh communist youth Union is an organization for Viet Namese youth II Language contents: Vocabulary: some words of activities Grammar: Past simple III.Teaching aids : Text book, lesson plan B/ Procedure: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: - Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the new words - The whole class sing a song of last lesson III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students,activities *Warm up : Game: Chatting Ask groups to discuss Ask ss to give out their ideas Remark and present the new lesson Work in Three groups Three groups discuss * Chatting : What you know about Youth + Play a game Union? Listen and answer (may be in Vietnamese) *Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the reading passage and some new words to Ss Pre – teach vocabulary : Listen and copy - to encourage : give the verb which means to give - Work individually Sb support - Citizenship (n) = quyÒn c«ng d©n - Copy down new lesson - coeducational (a) ( translation ) Repeat chorally , individually - Voluntary (a) = tù nguyÖn - to establish = to start / to create an organization -awareness (n) nhËn thøc Repeat the new words in chorus -establish (v) ThiÕt lËp Listen and correct by themselves -guideline (n) huíng dÈn Ask ss to repeat in chorus Ask ss to read Read the tale silently * Checking : Slap the board Underline the main information Remark and correct the mistake Observe and correct Correct by themselves *While - reading : Ask ss to scan the text silently and get the main information Ask ss to write their answers on the board Ask others to remark and correct Remark and give out the answer key Fill in the missing words *Answers: a)March 26th 1931 b) December 1976 c) their public awareness and form their personality Pairwork Observe and correct d) the guidelines Correct by themselves Answer Ask ss to ask and answer the questions about the text a) One can join the Youth Union at the age of 16 b) It was founded on March 26th 1931 c) It is Vietnam Communist Youth Union d)Helping the Handicapped, Cleaning the environment, Green summer volunteers campaign e) They aim to help the young develop their public Ask others to remark and correct awareness and form thei personality Remark and give out the answer key f) Its aims and principles established the guidelines for the Vietnamese youth *Post - reading : - Retell the main points of this lesson “ What is the main content of the lesson?” * Homework : - Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points - Ask and answer the questions again in the book - Do exercises in the workbook - Prepare for the next period: Part “Write” - Some Ss to retell the main points - Copy down homework Preparing date: 13/ 11/ 2015 Teaching Date : 14 /11/2015 Period: 35 UNIT 06 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB LESSON 04: READ I Aim Reading comprehension the passage about the boy count of America II Objective By the end of the lesson, S will be able to know more about a youth organization – the boy scouts of america (BSA) III Teaching aids - Tape and radio - Extra board IV Procedure Content T and S’ activities 1.Warm up Play game : Jumblet words Pre-reading a Vocab - Young pioneer and Youth organization - boy scouts of America (BSA): hội nam (Y & Y) : Tổ chức hướng đạo Mỹ hướng đạo hoa kỳ - build (v): rèn luyện (ý thức công dân ) - encourage (v): khuyến khích :sự khoẻ mạnh cá nhân - citizenship (n): quyền công dân - personal fitness (n) :-> - scouting (n) : hoạt động hướng đạo - get lost (v) : bị lạc đường - scouts association crossing the atlantic -> - the girl guides assciation (n): hiệp hội hướng đạo nữ - co- educational (adj ): thuộc gd hỗn hợp - coeducational camp fire boys and girls : - popular worldwide : phổ bién rộng khắp trên toàn giới - largest voluntary youth organization in the world - nation (n) - differ (v) : khác - slightly (adv) : , khá - aim (n) : mục đích - establish (v) : thiết lập - found (v) : thành lập , sáng lập -> founded - lead (v) : dẫn dắt , đưa đến -> led b T/F prediction The boy scout of america is a youth organization It has three aims : builds character, encourages, citizenship and personal fitness Scouting began in america William Boyce is businessman in LD Both boys and girls can join in BSA The scouting association is the biggest voluntary youth organization in the world While-reading * Check the T/F prediction T T F - in England F - an American businessman F - mainly for boys T * Ex1 : Fill in the mising date a 1907 c 1910 b 1909 d 1994 * Ex2 : Answer the questions When did scouting begin in england ? What led to the scouts association crossing the atlantic in 1910 ? What are scouting groups that girls can join ? - scout (n) : hướng đạo sinh : hiệp hội hướng đạo vượt đại tây dương : tổ chức hợp tác giáo dục lửa trại nam, nữ : tổ chức niên tình nguyện lớn giới S : Work in pairs to tick T/F T : Gives feedback T : Plays tape S : Listen and then read in silently to check their ex S : Correct the F sentences S : Work in pairs to fill T : Calls on some S to fill S : Read again the text and then work in pairs to answer - The meeting between a boy scout and Mr william - Girl guides associations and the coeducational S : Work in pairs Interview a member of the boys scouts What are the three aims of the scouting program ? Post-reading Interviewer Member of BSA - When did the scouting begin ? - in 1907 in - What are the three aims of the E scouting program ? - Can a girl join in the BSA - three aims - how many members does the - no SA have now ? - over 25 - Is it largest million member Homework Learn newwords by heard exercises in workbook and prepare writing of america T : Calls on some pairs to practice S: Work in pairs T: Give Feed back Preparing date: 13/ 11/ 2015 Teaching Date : 14 /11/2015 Period: 36 UNIT : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB LESSON 05: WRITE I Aim Writing a letter II Objecstive By the end of the lesson, S will be able to write a letter about a picture plan using “be going to” III Teaching aids - Extra board IV Procedure Content 1.Warm up I’m going to smt T : I’m going to answer teacher’s questions S1 : I’m going to buy a new bike S2 : I’m going to clean the house S3 : … Pre-writing a Vocab - community (n) : cộng đồng - recycling program (n): chương trình tái chế - natural resoure (n): tài nguyên thiên nhiên - fund (n): quỹ T and S’ activities Ask S the usage of “be going to” - Get S to make the sentence the V have to begin with a letter from A to Z T : Asks S to read the notice : S : Work in pairs to answer the questions - Collest glass, paper and cans to send them for recycling - Save natural resources and to earn money raising funds for the poor : gây quỹ vì người nghèo - sidewalk (n) : vỉa hè - register (v) : đăng kí b Reading the notice * Questions What members of the Y and Y have to in the recycling program ? 2.What is the purpose of the recycling program ? 3.What other programs can members of theY and Y participate in ? - Raising funds for poor, helping street children, planting trees and flowers along the sidewalks or in the park c Complete the letter (1) communite (6) save (2) recycling (7) earn (3) collest (8) participate (4) send (9) planting (5) recycling (10) helping While-writing *Questions : - Why does Hoa look happy ? - What is going to in the environment moth ? - What are they doing to earn money for their school Y and Y ? * Write : Dear Mom and Dad - Y & Y green group : Post-writing Write about some activities you are participating in the Y & Y of your school Homework Complete the writing * Feedback for the organization T : Asks S some questions to set the scene S : Work individual to complete the letter T : Gives feed back S : Read the letter T : Set the scene Hoa talks to her aunt about the Y and Y green group about the activities that she is going to S : Read the dialogue in pairs and then answer the questions S : Help Hoa write aletter to her parents Work individual Teaching date:24/11/2012 Period: 37 REVISION I Aim and objecstives - Introduce to S how to learn subject - Review how to use commands,requests and advises in reported speech,gerund II Teaching aids - Small board - Cards III Procedure Content T and S’ activities 1.Warm up * Questions T : Asks S some questions about their - what did you during your summer holiday holiday ? T : Introduces to S how learn subjecst - where did you go ? ………………… Presentation S : Copy * Command,requests and advises in reported speech S : Make ex +/ Câu khẳng định V+O -> S + told/asked + sb to st +/ Câu phủ định Don’t + V + O -> S + told/asked + sb + not to st EX: “ Don’t talk in cllass” the teacher said to students S : Change ->The teacher told the students not to talk in class * Advises in reported speech S + said “ S + should + st” ->S + said + S + should st -> S+ advised + sb + to st * Chú ý: câu trực tiếp dùng “said to” thì câu gían tiếp ta dùng là “told” * Gerund: danh động từ là từ tận cùng thêm “ing” vào đuôi có chức danh từ, tân ngữ, bổ ngữ có thể đứng đầu câu làm chủ ngữ EX: enjoy, practise, hate, like, love, finish, miss, avoid, … + V_ing Practise EX1: Chuyển các câu sau sang gián tiếp: “ Please lend me your dictionary, Quang” said Hoa “ Can you help me with my homework?” Minh said to Peter “ You should practise speaking E everyday” the teacher said “ Can you turn down the radio?” miss Brown said to her students EX2: Cho dạng đúng động từ: Stop (argue) and start (work) I like (think) carefully about things before (make) a decision Ask him (come) in Don’t keep him (stand) at the door Don’t forget (lock) the door before (go) to bed Production Chuyển các câu sau sang trực tiếp: Miss Smith told Ann to read books regularly My sister asked me not to stay up late He said to me that I should spend more time in the library Her sister said she should revise the lesson carefully Phuong”s brother asked her to close the door after going out Homework Review to prepare for 45 minutes test * Feedback S : Repeat Ex : We are learning E, now S : Change S: Work individually S : Copy and the ex T : Calls on some S to write on the board S : Copy and ex individual T : Calls on some S to check S : Copy and the ex T : Calls on some S to write on the board Unit 6Period 36 lesson : Listen + language focus Preparing Date: Teaching Date : A/ The aims: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to complete a song for details II.Teaching aids : Text book , cassette , chalk , posters , lesson plan B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up : Asks Ss to go to the board to read aloud their letter -Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Warm up : Listen to a song - Let Ss listen to the song for fun Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words to Ss *Pre – teach vocabulary - to unite = doan ket , hop nhat , ket hop ( trans) - peace (n) > < war (n) - (to) shout out (st) : noi to (action) - hold hand (v) : nam tay (action) - … From place to place …: tu noi den noi khac… + Land: (revision) + World: (revision) + South: (revision) + North: (revision) * Guess the missing words - Ask Ss to guess the words to fill in the gaps in the song - Get them to share with their partners and report their Students,activities Listen to a song Listen and copy down Work in groups to guess the missing words in the song Report their predictions Listen to the tape and check their predictions predictions Then write them on the board While - listening : - Turn on the tape times and ask Ss to check their predictions - Call on some Ss to read their results - Give feedback Children of our land unite Let,s sing for peace , Let,s sing for right Let,s sing for the love between north and south , Oh, children of our land , unite Children of the world hold hands Let,s show our love from place to place Let,s shout out loud , Let,s make a stand , Oh , children of the world , hold hands -Turn on the tape once more to check the results again Post - listening : - Ask Ss to work in groups to learn how to sing the song + Ss listen to the tape and repeat in chorally - Call on some Ss from each groups to sing a song * Language focus 2: + Gerunds: (danh dong tu) We use the _ing form as a noun called a gerund + The gerund as an uncountable noun in general statements eg: Dancing is fun + The gerund as an uncountablenoun with SOME, ANY , NO , A LOT OF, ALITTLE , ENOUGH eg: I did some shopping this morning … Read their answers Listen and check the results again Learn how to sing Listen and copy Work in groups of four - Some Ss of each group to sing a song Copy down new Grammar Structure -Work individually Give example - Look at the table and talk about their friends’ hobbies - Work in pairs - Copy the table in to the notebook -Then ask and answer the questions with your partner - *Look at the table Talk about our friends’ hobbies: A: Ba loves playing soccer , but he doesn’t like washing up B: Lan doesn’t like playing soccer and she doesn’t like washing up ,either … Some Ss retell the main points of this * Copy the table in to your exercise book.Then complete lesson it with information about you Next ask and answer -Copy down homeworks questions with your partner.: A - Do you like playing soccer ? B - No I hate it What about you ? C- Yes I love playing soccer D- … * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson Homework : Copy down the completed song Prepare the next lesson Teaching Date: 23/11/2012 Period 36 Unit 6: Lesson 5: Writing A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a letter about a future plan using be going to II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: II.Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , board, lesson plan B/ Procedure: I Organization: Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: T asks some questions – call Ss answer : c and d (57) + Keys: Girls can join in the : “ The Girl guides Association … The three aims of the … => Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students,activities *Warm up : Matching: Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing Play game and some new words to Ss ** Pre – teach vocabulary : - to raise fund ( translation ) - street children: (picture) - sidewalk (n): (picture) - register (n): (picture) Listen and copy - (to)recycle: (picture) - natural resources : coal oil , iron under the Listen and repeat chorally and ground or the sea individually * Reading the notice - Ask Ss to read the notice “ To : All Y and Y Copy down members of the school “ - Ask some questions to check their understanding a What members of the Y and Y have to in Read the notice and answer the the recycling program ? questions b What is the purpose of the recycling program ? c What other programs can members of the Y and Y participate in ? - Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions - Give feedback and ask them to practice in open pairs * Complete the letter - Ask some questions to set the scene : - Who writes the letter ? ( Nga ) - To whom does Nga write ? ( Linh ) - Is Nga a member of Y and Y ? ( Yes ) - What does Nga write to Linh about ? ( She writes about the programs of her school Y and Y that she is going to participate ) - Get Ss to work in pairs to fill in the gaps in the letter - Give feedback :1 community 2.recycling 3.collect send recycling save raise / earn participating planting 10 helping - Call on some Ss to read the complete letter and correct mistakes if any * Reading the dialogue :Set the scene“Hoa talks to her aunt about the Y and Y Green Group, about the activities that she is going to ” - Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and her aunt * Checking : Some questions : a Why does Hoa look happy ? b What is she going to in the environment month ? c.What are they doing to earn money for their school Y&Y? - Call on some Ss to demonstrate their answers in front of the class *While - writing : - Ask Ss to help Hoa to write a letter to her parents - Get Ss to work in group of or to write a letter on poster Move around the class and help then if they are necessary *Post - writing : - Choose four letters from group and stick them on the board Get the whole class to read the letters and correct them - Give feedback : * Suggested letter Dear Mom and Dad , I am very happy to tell you that I am able to join in the Y & Y Green Group of my school The green Group is holding an environment month Practice asking and answering the questions in pairs Listen and answer ( the whole ) Work in pairs to complete the letter Read the complete letter Listen and copy Practice asking and answering the questions Work in groups to write the letter Stick their letters on the board and correct its mistakes Read the suggested letter aloud plan We are going to clean the lakes,banks on weekends We are also going to plant trees and flowers in the parks and water them every afternoon after class We are planting young trees and plants Listen and copy to sell to other schools I hope that we can bring more green to the city and earn some money for the school Y&Y The program is very interesting and useful , is not it ? I am still in a very good health I will tell you more about the group activities later With love , Hoa *Homeworks: Ask each student to help Hoa write a letter to her parents in their notebooks Preparing date: Teaching Date : / 11/ 2015 /11/2015 Period 37 Consolodation A/ Objectives: I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar from unit to unit - Develop Ss’ four skills II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: The past simple , used to, present tense with future meaning, …… III Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters B/ Procedure; I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: -Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue - Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students,activities Warm up : Brainstorming *Possible answers : - Clean up the streets - Help elderly people - Take part in sports Play game - Help handicappied / street children - Collect and empty garbage … ** Presentation : Present tense with future meaning Pre – teach vocabulary - a ret home : a place where old or sick people are cared for - an orphanage : a place where children without parents live - a stadium ( picture ) * Checking : Rub out and remember Setting the scene : Introduce the dialogue “ Lan Listen and repeat chorally , and Mai are members of the Y&Y organization individually They are talking about the summer activity Copy down program” Lan : …(1…….we collect and empty garbage ? Mai : at Dong Xuan Market Play game Lan : … (2)…… we collect ……(3)………? Mai : On January Listen carefully Lan : ………(4)…… we start and ……(5)… ? Mai : …… (6) …… am and ……(7) … pm - Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue - Call on some pairs to play the role of Lan and mai to practice the dialogue - Give feedback *Keys: Work in pairs to practice the where when an empty garbage dialogue what time finish we start at finish at c Concept checking :- Ask Ss some questions to check their understanding a When we “ where “ ? b When we use “ when “ ? c When we use “ what time “ ? d Is the date at present or in the future ? e What tense we use in the dialogue ? => We use simple present tense to express an action that happens in the future - Ask Ss to practice asking and answering about the Y&Y activity by using the following cues - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue - Give feedback Gerunds : * Form : Like , love , enjoy , hate + Ving * Survey : - Ask Ss to work in groups of three to ask their friends and stick on the chart - Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends, hobbies Eg : Ba loves playing soccer He does not like cooking and especially hate washing dishes Modals : may , can , could - Ask Ss to repeat the uses of the offering assistance , asking for favors and how to respond - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class - Give feedback a /A : Can you buy a ticket for me ? B : Can you take me across the road ? C : Could you help me with this math problem ? D : Can you water the flowers in the garden? b / A : May I help you ? A : Do you need any help ? B : Let me help you A : Yes That is very kind of you - Ask them to practice the dialogue in front of the class * Consolidation: -Retell the main points of this lesson *Homework : Copy all the exercises in their notebooks Prepare the next lesson * Feedback Practice asking and answering to draw the form Copy down Practice asking and answering the questions about the Y&Y activity Listen and copy Work in groups of three or four Report their results Repeat the uses of the “ Asking for favors / offering assistance and how to respond “ Practice speaking the dialogue Listen and copy Ss copy down Preparing date: / 11/ 2015 Teaching Date : /11/2015 Period 38 Test( no ) A / The aims : I Teaching points : Students will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt form unit to unit so that they can supplement what they are short of II Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization: II Checking up: III Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson - Deliver test papers to Ss *- Ma trËn: Chủ đề NhËn biÕt II Reading III Language focus IV Writing TN TL TL TN TL 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0 V Listening Tæng sè: VËn dông Tæng sè TN I Phonetic Th«ng hiÓu 12 3,0 3,0 1,0 0,5 1,5 0,5 2,5 2,0 0,5 1,0 2,0 2,5 2,0 29 10 4,0 Number LISTENING: I.Listen and complete the following passage (1pt) Let me tell you how to get to our (1)…………… Are you coming by car? OK You drive along the A1734 towards Blackstone past about(2) ………… miles; go past the first turn to Stroop,(3) ………….the second turn, and then go(4) ……… on for you Come to a crossroads II.Listen and answer true (T) or false (F) (1pt) She is coming by car ……………… She drives along the A 1735 ……………… PHONETICS : I.Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others ( pt) A tie B participation C highlight D underline A south B sound C mouth D touch A buffalo B.wisdom C.rope D.clothes A equipment B upset C.end D help LANGUAGE FOCUS: I Circle the best answer: A, B, C or D to complete all the sentences (1 pt): “ The lost shoe” is one of the ………… Stories I like best A tradition B traditional C beautiful D beauty We must be there 7.30 and 10.30 A between B before C after D at His brother often drives too A bad B fastly C faster D fast Peter is very proud his school A in B off C of D on II- Supply the correct forms of the verbs in bracket to complete the sentences (0,5pt) Nam likes……………………to music.( listen) He told me ………………… (not talk) in the class III Give the correct form of the words in parentheses (0.5pt) Surface mail is than airmail ( cheap ) There was an of paintings at the art gallery ( exhibit ) READING: Read the passage carefully: In the first year of lower secondary school Nga had some difficulties in learning English Her pronunciation of English words was really bad and her English grammar was worse She did not know how to improve them One afternoon after the lesson, her teacher of English told her to wait for her outside the classroom She took her to the school library and show her how to improve her pronunciation with a cassette.She also told her how to use an English - English dictionary to improve her English grammar Now her English is better and she has just won a prize in the English Speaking contest I T/ F: (1pt) Nga had some difficulties in learning English Her English pronunciation was really good II Answer the questions: (1,5pt) Did she know how to improve her English? How is her English now? 3.Who helped her improve her English? WRITING: Write the sentences with the given words.(0,5 pt) 1.The students / take part/ the Green Sunday organization last week ……………………………………………………………………… 2.The green group/ be/ holding/ an environment month …………………………………………………………………… Rewrite the sentences (2pt): 1/ "Can you give me your pen?", Lan said to me ® Lan asked me 2/Those boys are interested in playing badminton ® Those boys enjoy 3/My mother said to my sister, "You should work harder on Math and Literature." ® My mother advised my sister……………………………………… 4/My grandmother lived in the countryside when she was young à My grandmother used……………………………………………… Number LISTENING: I.Listen and complete the following passage (1pt) Let me tell you how to get to our (1)…………… Are you coming by car? OK You drive along the A1734 towards Blackstone past about(2) ………… miles; go past the first turn to Stroop,(3) ………….the second turn, and then go(4) ……… on for you Come to a crossroads II.Listen and answer true (T) or false (F) (1pt) She drives along the A 1735 ……………… She is coming by car ……………… READING: Read the passage carefully: In the first year of lower secondary school Nga had some difficulties in learning English Her pronunciation of English words was really bad and her English grammar was worse She did not know how to improve them One afternoon after the lesson, her teacher of English told her to wait for her outside the classroom She took her to the school library and show her how to improve her pronunciation with a cassette.She also told her how to use an English - English dictionary to improve her English grammar Now her English is better and she has just won a prize in the English Speaking contest I T/ F: (1pt) Nga had some difficulties in learning English Her English pronunciation was really good II Answer the questions: (1,5pt) Did she know how to improve her English? How is her English now? 3.Who helped her improve her English? LANGUAGE FOCUS: I Circle the best answer: A, B, C or D to complete all the sentences (1 pt): “ The lost shoe” is one of the ………… Stories I like best A tradition B traditional C beautiful D beauty We must be there 7.30 and 10.30 A between B before C after D at His brother often drives too A bad B fastly C faster D fast Peter is very proud his school A in B off C of D on II Give the correct form of the words in parentheses (0.5pt) Surface mail is than airmail ( cheap ) There was an of paintings at the art gallery ( exhibit ) III- Supply the correct forms of the verbs in bracket to complete the sentences (0,5pt) 1.Nam likes……………………to music.( listen) 2.He told me ………………… (not talk) in the class WRITING: Rewrite the sentences (2pt): 1/ "Can you give me your pen?", Lan said to me ® Lan asked me 2/Those boys are interested in playing badminton ® Those boys enjoy 3/My mother said to my sister, "You should work harder on Math and Literature." ® My mother advised my sister ……………………………… 4/My grandmother lived in the countryside when she was young à My grandmother used……………………………………………… Write the sentences with the given words.(0,5 pt) The students / take part/ the Green Sunday organization last week ……………………………………………………………………… 2.The green group/ be/ holding/ an environment month …………………………………………………………………… PHONETICS : ( pt) I Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others A buffalo B.wisdom C.rope D.clothes A equipment B upset C.end D help A tie B participation C highlight D underline A south B sound C mouth D touch THE SECOND TEST- CODE Time: 45 minutes Name: …………………………… Class: LISTENING: I.Listen and complete the following passage (1pt) Let me tell you how to get to our (1)…………… Are you coming by car? OK You drive along the A1734 towards Blackstone past about(2) ………… miles; go past the first turn to Stroop,(3) ………….the second turn, and then go(4) ……… on for you Come to a crossroads II.Listen and answer true (T) or false (F) (1pt) She is coming by car ……………… She drives along the A 1735 ……………… PHONETICS : I.Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others ( pt) A tie B participation C highlight D underline A south B sound C mouth D touch A buffalo B.wisdom C.rope D.clothes A equipment B upset C.end D help LANGUAGE FOCUS: I Circle the best answer: A, B, C or D to complete all the sentences (1 pt): “ The lost shoe” is one of the ………… Stories I like best A tradition B traditional C beautiful D beauty We must be there 7.30 and 10.30 A between B before C after D at His brother often drives too A bad B fastly C faster D fast Peter is very proud his school A in B off C of D on II- Supply the correct forms of the verbs in bracket to complete the sentences (0,5pt) Nam likes……………………to music.( listen) He told me ………………… (not talk) in the class III Give the correct form of the words in parentheses (0.5pt) Surface mail is than airmail ( cheap ) There was an of paintings at the art gallery ( exhibit ) READING: Read the passage carefully: In the first year of lower secondary school Nga had some difficulties in learning English Her pronunciation of English words was really bad and her English grammar was worse She did not know how to improve them One afternoon after the lesson, her teacher of English told her to wait for her outside the classroom She took her to the school library and show her how to improve her pronunciation with a cassette.She also told her how to use an English - English dictionary to improve her English grammar Now her English is better and she has just won a prize in the English Speaking contest I T/ F: (1pt) Nga had some difficulties in learning English Her English pronunciation was really good II Answer the questions: (1,5pt) Did she know how to improve her English? How is her English now? 3.Who helped her improve her English? WRITING: Write the sentences with the given words.(0,5 pt) 1.The students / take part/ the Green Sunday organization last week ……………………………………………………………………… 2.The green group/ be/ holding/ an environment month …………………………………………………………………… Rewrite the sentences (2pt): 1/ "Can you give me your pen?", Lan said to me ® Lan asked me 2/Those boys are interested in playing badminton ® Those boys enjoy 3/My mother said to my sister, "You should work harder on Math and Literature." ® My mother advised my sister……………………………………… 4/My grandmother lived in the countryside when she was young à My grandmother used……………………………………………… THE SECOND TEST- CODE Name: …………………………… Class: LISTENING: I.Listen and complete the following passage (1pt) Let me tell you how to get to our (1)…………… Are you coming by car? OK You drive along the A1734 towards Blackstone past about(2) ………… miles; go past the first turn to Stroop,(3) ………….the second turn, and then go(4) ……… on for you Come to a crossroads II.Listen and answer true (T) or false (F) (1pt) She drives along the A 1735 ……………… She is coming by car ……………… READING: Read the passage carefully: In the first year of lower secondary school Nga had some difficulties in learning English Her pronunciation of English words was really bad and her English grammar was worse She did not know how to improve them One afternoon after the lesson, her teacher of English told her to wait for her outside the classroom She took her to the school library and show her how to improve her pronunciation with a cassette.She also told her how to use an English - English dictionary to improve her English grammar Now her English is better and she has just won a prize in the English Speaking contest I T/ F: (1pt) Nga had some difficulties in learning English Her English pronunciation was really good II Answer the questions: (1,5pt) Did she know how to improve her English? How is her English now? 3.Who helped her improve her English? LANGUAGE FOCUS: I Circle the best answer: A, B, C or D to complete all the sentences (1 pt): “ The lost shoe” is one of the ………… Stories I like best A tradition B traditional C beautiful D beauty We must be there 7.30 and 10.30 A between B before C after D at His brother often drives too A bad B fastly C faster D fast Peter is very proud his school A in B off C of D on II Give the correct form of the words in parentheses (0.5pt) Surface mail is than airmail ( cheap ) There was an of paintings at the art gallery ( exhibit ) III- Supply the correct forms of the verbs in bracket to complete the sentences (0,5pt) 1.Nam likes……………………to music.( listen) 2.He told me ………………… (not talk) in the class WRITING: Rewrite the sentences (2pt): 1/ "Can you give me your pen?", Lan said to me ® Lan asked me 2/Those boys are interested in playing badminton ® Those boys enjoy 3/My mother said to my sister, "You should work harder on Math and Literature." ® My mother advised my sister ……………………………… 4/My grandmother lived in the countryside when she was young à My grandmother used……………………………………………… Write the sentences with the given words.(0,5 pt) The students / take part/ the Green Sunday organization last week ……………………………………………………………………… 2.The green group/ be/ holding/ an environment month …………………………………………………………………… PHONETICS : ( pt) I Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others A buffalo B.wisdom C.rope D.clothes A equipment B upset C.end D help A tie B participation C highlight D underline A south B sound C mouth D touch Preparing date: / 11/ 2015 Teaching Date : /11/2015 Period 39 TEST REMARK I Objectives By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to remember the old structures and find out their mistakes in the test to corrects II Language contents Grammar: Review the simple present tense with “general truth”, “enough to”, “be going to”, III Techniques: Asking and answering, pair work, chatting IV Teaching aids: textbook, 45 minutes test V Procedures LISTENING: I.Listen and complete the following passage (1pt) place Take Twelve Straight II.Listen and answer true (T) or false (F) (1pt) Code 1: T F Code 2: 1.F T PHONETICS :( x 0,25 = 1M) I B participation D touch 3.B.wisdom 4.A equipment LANGUAGE FOCUS: I ( x 0,25 = 1M) “ The lost shoe” is one of the ………… stories I like best (B traditional) We must be there 7.30 and 10.30.( A between) His brother often drives too (D fast) Peter is very proud his school (C of) II- (2 x 0,25 = 0,5m) 5.Nam likes……………………to music.( listening) 6.He told me ………………… in the class.(not to talk) III (2 x 0,25 = 0.5m) Surface mail is than airmail ( cheaper ) There was an of paintings at the art gallery ( exhibition ) READING: Read the passage carefully: In the first year of lower secondary school Nga had some difficulties in learning English Her pronunciation of English words was really bad and her English grammar was worse She did not know how to improve them One afternoon after the lesson, her teacher of English told her to wait for her outside the classroom She took her to the school library and show her how to improve her pronunciation with a cassette.She also told her how to use an English - English dictionary to improve her English grammar Now her English is better and she has just won a prize in the English Speaking contest I T/ F: ( x 0,5 = 1m) Nga had some difficulties in learning English T Her English pronunciation was really good F II (3 x 0,5 = 1,5m) Did she know how to improve her English? No, she didn’t How is her English now? Now her English is better and she has just won a prize in the English Speaking contest 3.Who helped her improve her English? -(Her English teacher) helps her to improve her English WRITING: (2 x 0,25 = 0,5m) a.The students / take part/ the Green Sunday organization last week ->The students took part in the Green Sunday organization last week b.The green group/ be/ holding/ an environment month plan -> The green group is holding an environment month plan (4 x 0,5 =2m): 1/ "Can you give me your pen?", Lan said to me ® Lan asked me to give her my pen 2/Those boys are interested in playing badminton ® They enjoy playing badminton 3/My mother said to my sister, "You should work harder on Math and Literature." ® My mother advised my sister to work harder on Math and Literature 4/My grandmother lived in the countryside when she was young à My grandmother used to live in the countryside when she was young =========================****************====================== Preparing date: / 11/ 2015 Teaching Date : /11/2015 Period 38 Test( no ) A / The aims : I Teaching points : Students will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt form unit to unit so that they can supplement what they are short of II Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization: II Checking up: III Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson - Deliver test papers to Ss *- Ma trËn: NhËn biÕt Chủ đề TN TL 0,5 I Phonetic VËn dông Tæng sè: TN TL TN TL 0,5 2,5 II Reading III Language focus IV Writing Tæng sè: Th«ng hiÓu 2,0 1,0 10 3,5 10 2,5 2,5 1,5 15 5,0 1,5 14 4,5 2,5 25 10 Number I/PHONETIC: Chọn từ mà phần gạch chân có cách phát âm khác các từ còn lại ( 0.5pt) A a tie B participation C highlight D underline A south B sound C mouth D touch II/VOCABULARIES & STRUCRURES: Khoanh tròn A B,C D hoàn thành các câu sau: (2,5 pts) Ba always gets excellent grades because he studies ……… A hard B badly C fast D softly Could you me a …………,please? – Sure A favor B fitness C organization D.scout When he was young, he ………………… fishing with his brother a uses to go B used to go C was used to go D is used to going Yesterday morning she ……………absent from clas because she was ill A is B was C will be D would be They hate………………… television in the evening A watched B watches C watching D watch Miss Jackson asked me ……………you this report card for this semester A to give B gives C gave D giving My teacher said I …………work harder on my Spanish pronunciation A am B.should C.have D.do Boy : “ …………………………… ?” Girl: “ No, Thank you I am fine” A Do you need any help? B I need a favor C Could you me a favor? D How can I help you? My father used us to the zoo when he was alive A took B take C to take D taking 10 She asked her children A to stop playing B stop to play C stop playing D stopping to play III/ READING Đọc đoạn văn sau và đánh dấu X vào ô Đúng (True) False (F): ( 2,5pts) Lan is excited about the interesting activities she is going to The Y & Y is having a plan to help the community She will participate in its recycling program In joining this program, she will collect glass, used paper and empty cans Then she will send them for recycling She hopes she can save natural resources and raise some money for her school Y& Y in these activities She also thinks about participating in either planting trees and flowers or helping street children It is really interesting SENTENCE TRUE FALSE The Y & Y is going to help the community She will collect glass, used paper and empty cans and send them for recycling She thinks that she can save natural resources The program is really boring Lan is not happy with the planning of Y& Y IV/WRITING A Khoanh tròn A ,B,C D để tìm lỗi sai các câu sau đây: (2.0pt) She used to lived on a farm when she was young A B C D I will participate on the recycling program to earn money for my schoolY&Y A B C D He is speaking soft because he has a sore throat A B C D Ba loves playing soccer,but he doesn’t like washed up A B C D B.Viết lại các câu sau cho nghĩa câu không thay đổi: ( 1.0pts) I said to him “Stay at home!” -> I told him………………………………………………………………………………… My mother said to us “Don’t watch TV much.” -> My mother asked us …………………………………………………………………… Ba is interested in playing sport after school -> Ba enjoys………………………………………………………………………………… “You should stay in bed for a few days”, the doctor said to Mr Lam The doctor said C.H·y hoµn tÊt l¸ th:(1.5pts) Dear Khanh, Thanks/ your letter I/ pleased/ hear/ you/ have/ interesting Teacher’s day We/ receive/ first semester report/ few days ago I/ get/ good/ grades/ Math/ Language/ History/ but/ English result/ be/ poor English teacher/ ask/ me/ spend more time/ it/ so /I/ study harder/ next semester Write/ soon/ and/ tell/ all your news Regards Tuan Number I/PHONETIC: Chọn từ mà phần gạch chân có cách phát âm khác các từ còn lại ( 0.5pt) A south B sound C mouth D touch A a tie B participation C highlight D underline II/VOCABULARIES & STRUCRURES: Khoanh tròn A B,C D hoàn thành các câu sau: (2,5 pts) Miss Jackson asked me ……………you this report card for this semester A to give B gives C gave D giving My teacher said I …………work harder on my Spanish pronunciation A am B.should C.have D.do Boy : “ …………………………… ?” Girl: “ No, Thank you I am fine” A Do you need any help? B I need a favor C Could you me a favor? D How can I help you? My father used us to the zoo when he was alive A took B take C to take D taking She asked her children A to stop playing B stop to play C stop playing D stopping to play Ba always gets excellent grades because he studies ……… A hard B badly C fast D softly Could you me a …………,please? – Sure A favor B fitness C organization D.scout When he was young, he ………………… fishing with his brother a uses to go B used to go C was used to go D is used to going Yesterday morning she ……………absent from clas because she was ill A is B was C will be D would be 10 They hate………………… television in the evening A watched B watches C watching D watch III/ READING Đọc đoạn văn sau và đánh dấu X vào ô Đúng (True) False (F): ( 2,5pts) Lan is excited about the interesting activities she is going to The Y & Y is having a plan to help the community She will participate in its recycling program In joining this program, she will collect glass, used paper and empty cans Then she will send them for recycling She hopes she can save natural resources and raise some money for her school Y& Y in these activities She also thinks about participating in either planting trees and flowers or helping street children It is really interesting SENTENCE TRUE FALSE The Y & Y is going to help the hospital Lan is happy with the planning of Y& Y She thinks that she can not save natural resources The program is really interesting She will collect glass, used paper and empty cans and send them for recycling IV/WRITING A Khoanh tròn A ,B,C D để tìm lỗi sai các câu sau đây: (2.0pt) He is speaking soft because he has a sore throat A B C D Ba loves playing soccer,but he doesn’t like washed up A B C D She used to lived on a farm when she was young A B C D I will participate on the recycling program to earn money for my schoolY&Y A B C D B.Viết lại các câu sau cho nghĩa câu không thay đổi: ( 1.0pts) Ba is interested in playing sport after school -> Ba enjoys ………………………………………………………………………… “You should stay in bed for a few days”, the doctor said to Mr Lam The doctor said I said to him “Stay at home!” -> I told him…………………………………………………………………………… My mother said to us “Don’t watch TV much.” -> My mother asked us ………………………………………………………………… C.H·y hoµn tÊt l¸ th:(1.5pts) Dear Hong, Thanks/ your letter I/ pleased/ hear/ you/ have/ interesting Teacher’s day We/ receive/ first semester report/ few days ago I/ get/ good/ grades/ Math/ Language/ History/ but/ English result/ be/ poor English teacher/ ask/ me/ spend more time/ it/ so /I/ study harder/ next semester Write/ soon/ and/ tell/ all your news Regards Linh The English written Test 45 minutes : No 2-A Name: Class: I/PHONETIC: Chọn từ mà phần gạch chân có cách phát âm khác các từ còn lại ( 0.5pt) A a tie B participation C highlight D underline A south B sound C mouth D touch II/VOCABULARIES & STRUCRURES: Khoanh tròn A B,C D hoàn thành các câu sau: (2,5 pts) Ba always gets excellent grades because he studies ……… A hard B badly C fast D softly Could you me a …………,please? – Sure A favor B fitness C organization D.scout When he was young, he ………………… fishing with his brother a uses to go B used to go C was used to go D is used to going Yesterday morning she ……………absent from clas because she was ill A is B was C will be D would be They hate………………… television in the evening A watched B watches C watching D watch Miss Jackson asked me ……………you this report card for this semester A to give B gives C gave D giving My teacher said I …………work harder on my Spanish pronunciation A am B.should C.have D.do Boy : “ …………………………… ?” Girl: “ No, Thank you I am fine” A Do you need any help? B I need a favor C Could you me a favor? D How can I help you? My father used us to the zoo when he was alive A took B take C to take D taking 10 She asked her children A to stop playing B stop to play C stop playing D stopping to play III/ READING Đọc đoạn văn sau và đánh dấu X vào ô Đúng (True) False (F): ( 2,5pts) Lan is excited about the interesting activities she is going to The Y & Y is having a plan to help the community She will participate in its recycling program In joining this program, she will collect glass, used paper and empty cans Then she will send them for recycling She hopes she can save natural resources and raise some money for her school Y& Y in these activities She also thinks about participating in either planting trees and flowers or helping street children It is really interesting SENTENCE TRUE FALSE The Y & Y is going to help the community She will collect glass, used paper and empty cans and send them for recycling She thinks that she can save natural resources The program is really boring Lan is not happy with the planning of Y& Y IV/WRITING A Khoanh tròn A ,B,C D để tìm lỗi sai các câu sau đây: (2.0pt) She used to lived on a farm when she was young A B C D I will participate on the recycling program to earn money for my schoolY&Y A B C D He is speaking soft because he has a sore throat A B C D Ba loves playing soccer,but he doesn’t like washed up A B C D B.Viết lại các câu sau cho nghĩa câu không thay đổi: ( 1.0pts) I said to him “Stay at home!” -> I told him………………………………………………………………………………… My mother said to us “Don’t watch TV much.” -> My mother asked us …………………………………………………………………… Ba is interested in playing sport after school -> Ba enjoys………………………………………………………………………………… “You should stay in bed for a few days”, the doctor said to Mr Lam The doctor said C.H·y hoµn tÊt l¸ th:(1.5pts) Dear Khanh, Thanks/ your letter I/ pleased/ hear/ you/ have/ interesting Teacher’s day We/ receive/ first semester report/ few days ago I/ get/ good/ grades/ Math/ Language/ History/ but/ English result/ be/ poor English teacher/ ask/ me/ spend more time/ it/ so /I/ study harder/ next semester Write/ soon/ and/ tell/ all your news Regards Tuan …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………… The English written Test 45 minutes : No 2-B Name: Class: I/PHONETIC: Chọn từ mà phần gạch chân có cách phát âm khác các từ còn lại ( 0.5pt) A south B sound C mouth D touch A a tie B participation C highlight D underline II/VOCABULARIES & STRUCRURES: Khoanh tròn A B,C D hoàn thành các câu sau: (2,5 pts) Miss Jackson asked me ……………you this report card for this semester A to give B gives C gave D giving My teacher said I …………work harder on my Spanish pronunciation A am B.should C.have D.do Boy : “ …………………………… ?” Girl: “ No, Thank you I am fine” A Do you need any help? B I need a favor C Could you me a favor? D How can I help you? My father used us to the zoo when he was alive A took B take C to take D taking She asked her children A to stop playing B stop to play C stop playing D stopping to play Ba always gets excellent grades because he studies ……… A hard B badly C fast D softly Could you me a …………,please? – Sure A favor B fitness C organization D.scout When he was young, he ………………… fishing with his brother a uses to go B used to go C was used to go D is used to going Yesterday morning she ……………absent from clas because she was ill A is B was C will be D would be 10 They hate………………… television in the evening A watched B watches C watching D watch III/ READING Đọc đoạn văn sau và đánh dấu X vào ô Đúng (True) False (F): ( 2,5pts) Lan is excited about the interesting activities she is going to The Y & Y is having a plan to help the community She will participate in its recycling program In joining this program, she will collect glass, used paper and empty cans Then she will send them for recycling She hopes she can save natural resources and raise some money for her school Y& Y in these activities She also thinks about participating in either planting trees and flowers or helping street children It is really interesting SENTENCE TRUE FALSE The Y & Y is going to help the hospital Lan is happy with the planning of Y& Y She thinks that she can not save natural resources The program is really interesting She will collect glass, used paper and empty cans and send them for recycling IV/WRITING A Khoanh tròn A ,B,C D để tìm lỗi sai các câu sau đây: (2.0pt) He is speaking soft because he has a sore throat A B C D Ba loves playing soccer,but he doesn’t like washed up A B C D She used to lived on a farm when she was young A B C D I will participate on the recycling program to earn money for my schoolY&Y A B C D B.Viết lại các câu sau cho nghĩa câu không thay đổi: ( 1.0pts) Ba is interested in playing sport after school -> Ba enjoys ………………………………………………………………………… “You should stay in bed for a few days”, the doctor said to Mr Lam The doctor said I said to him “Stay at home!” -> I told him…………………………………………………………………………… My mother said to us “Don’t watch TV much.” -> My mother asked us ………………………………………………………………… C.H·y hoµn tÊt l¸ th:(1.5pts) Dear Hong, Thanks/ your letter I/ pleased/ hear/ you/ have/ interesting Teacher’s day We/ receive/ first semester report/ few days ago I/ get/ good/ grades/ Math/ Language/ History/ but/ English result/ be/ poor English teacher/ ask/ me/ spend more time/ it/ so /I/ study harder/ next semester Write/ soon/ and/ tell/ all your news Regards Linh …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………… Teaching Date : 30 /11/2012 Period 39 TEST REMARK I Objectives By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to remember the old structures and find out their mistakes in the test to corrects II Language contents Grammar: Review the simple present tense with “general truth”, “enough to”, “be going to”, III Techniques: Asking and answering, pair work, chatting IV Teaching aids: textbook, 45 minutes test V Procedures T and Ss’ activities Warm-up T: asks Ss to comment the 45 minutes by themselves Ss: comment New lesson a Presentation T: asks Ss to retell the simple present tense with “Tobe”, question words, How many ?, This, that Ss: answer T: comments and gives the corrects answer Ss: take note and check their tests b Practice T: asks Ss to base on the structures correcting the test Ss: work in pairs part1 Ss: comment - T: corrects Ss: take note Contents The simple present tense with general truth, future meaning S+ V-infi/V+s/es+O Enough to : S + BE + AJD+ ENOUGH TO+ V-infi BE GOING TO S+ be going to+ V- infi The simple past tense S+ V-ed/C2+O 5.Prepositions of time:in,on,at,after,before,between 6.Used to 7.Adverbs of manner 8.Modal verbs 9.Commands,requests,and advice in reported speech 10.Gerunds * KEYS 1S: writes on the board part2 Ss: comment T: corrects their mistakes Ss: take note Ss: ask and answer in pairs part3 Ss: comment 1S: writes on the board T: gives the corrects answers Ss: take note Ss: discuss in pairs part4 1S: writes the complete sentence on the board Ss: comment T: gives the corrects answer Ss: take note Consolidation T: asks some questions ( ask Ss close their books and the test ) Ss: answer T: reviews the main points and asks Ss to learn the lesson carefully for the next test Ss: listen and remember Homework T: asks Ss to: Ss: listen and take note I / (0,5marks) No 1: 1.B 2.D No 2: 1.D 2.B II / 2.5(marks) No 1: 1.A A B B 5.C 6.A 7.B 8.A 9.C 10.A No 2: A 2.B 3.A 4.C 5.A 6.A 7.A 8.B 9.B 10.C III / 2,5 (marks) No 1: 1.T T T F 5.F No 2: F T F T 5.T IV A (marks) No 1: B B 3.B D No 2: B D B B B (marks) No 1: 1.I told him to stay at home 2.My mother asked us not to watch T V much Ba enjoying playing sport after school 4.The doctor said Mr Lam should stay in bed for a few days No 2: Ba enjoying playing sport after school The doctor said Mr Lam should stay in bed for a few days I told him to stay at home My mother asked us not to watch T V much C 1,5 (MARKS) Dear Hong, Thanks for your letter I am pleased to hear you had an interesting Teacher’s day We receive ed our first semester report a few days ago I got good grades for Math , Language anh History but my English result was poor My English teacher asked me to spend more time on it ,so I must study harder next semester Write soon and tell me all your news Regards Linh - Write the complete test - Learn by heart the structures again Preparing date: / 11/ 2015 Teaching Date : /11/2015 Period 40: Unit : My neighborhood Lesson :Getting started +Listen and read A/Objectives: I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to know more about Na,s new neighbor II Language contents: Vocabulary Grammar: the present perfect tenses III.Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , boards , chalk B/ Procedure: I Organization:- Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: III New lesson: Teacher’s activities *Warm up : Getting started - Ask Ss to match the names of places with the suitable pictures - Ask for their meanings to make sure Ss know exactly what they mean *Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words + Pre – teach vocabulary - close by (adv) : a short distance - to serve : give sb food or drink - a pancake : banh ran - tasty (a) = delicious (a) * Checking vocabulary : What and where Guiding questions : - Set the scene “ Nam and Na are talking about the place where they live But Na is new there “ Questions : a How long has Nam lived in that neighborhood ? b Where does Na want to go ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and predict the answers and call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board While - reading : * Ask Ss to read silently the dialogue between Nam and Na then ask them if their answers are correct or not - Give feedback : a He has lived there for 10 years b Na wants to go to a restaurant * Ask Ss to the exercise / 64 individually , then compare with their partners - Call on some Ss to read their answers and give feedback : a new b last week c tired d restaurant e Hue f pancakes * Answers given : - Give Ss some answers and ask them to make questions a Nam has lived here for 10 years b Yes my mother is too tired to cook c The restaurant serves Hue food d Hue food is very good - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice asking and answering => Questions a How long has Nam lived here ? Students,activities Play game ( whole class ) * Answers : a grocery store b stadium c wet market d drug store , e hairdresser s f swimming pool Listen and copy Listen and repeat chorally , individually Copy down Play game Listen to the scene and work in groups to predict the answers to the guiding questions Report their predictions Read the dialogue to check their predictions - Teacher give them marks if necessary Work individually b Is Na,s mother tired ? c What kind of food does the restaurant serve ? d What is the food like ? ** Post - reading : Write - Ask Ss to write a passage about their neighborhood by answering the following questions a How long have you lived in your neighborhood ? b Do you like it ? Why ? c Is there a restaurant / post – office / market / bank / shop in your neighborhood ? d.How you to keep your neighborhood clean ? - Move around the class and help Ss - Call on some Ss to read their writings aloud - Correct mistakes * Consolidation: -Retell the main points of this leson * Homework : Write the complete writing about their neighborhood Do exercise in workbook * Feedback Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions - T give them marks if necessary Open pairs -> closed pairs Write individually Demonstrate their writings in front of class Listen and copy down homeworks Preparing date: / 11/ 2015 Teaching Date : /11/2015 Period 41 Unit Lesson : Speak + L.F I/ Objectives: By the end of this lesson, Ps will be able to produce a conversation between a sender and an assistance of the post office II/ Language contents: Vocabulary: surface mail, airmail, item, charge, parcel Structure: Present perfect tense: I’ve never been to Questions and answers about price (review) Comparisons (review) III/ Techniques: Question and answer, brainstorming, True or False, Fill in the blanks IV/ Teaching aids: Picture, tape, stereo, chart, real object, tape V/ Procedures of teaching: Teacher’s activities Students,activities What are these? Warm up : When you use them? postcard Using stamps, envelopes to ask Ps Pre-speaking: Explaining the new words by using Question & Answer T : How did they send these things? Asking Ps to repeat While-speaking: Introduction: T uses a picture to ask Ps T reads the dialogue and asks Ps to listen Ps read the dialogue in silence T asks Ps to answer the questions Asking Ps to practice in pairs (5’) Asking Ps to read the dialogue and fill in the chart T gives cues, Ps practice T : I want to send a letter by airmail It weighs grams T & a P make a conversation Ps practice in pairs (5’) Post-speaking: T gives Ps situations or cues Ps practice Getting feedback T remarks and give marks Language focus * Game : Pelmanism differen chea expensiv long sam t p e e modern short big smal l - Show Ss books , a red book and a yellow one which have the same size and a bigger brown dictionary then ask Ss to make comparisons Example : - The red book is the same as the yellow one - The red book is as big as the yellow one - The yellow book is different from the brown dictionary - The yellow is not as big as the brown dictionary => Form : The same as … ( not ) as … as / different from - Ask Ss to work in pairs to the exercise / 70 - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class - Give feedback By car / ship / train / air New word Parcel (n) gói hàng Airmail (n) thư tín gửi máy bay Surface mail (n) thư tín gửi đường Where are they? Who is this? - Does Mrs Kim send the parcel by airmail or surface mail? - How much is airmail Items Weight Charge Mail Surface Air Cues Letter / 2grams / Parcel / kg / 5/ c) more expensive than d) the same as e) as cheap as than i) not cheaper than g) as long as f) larger than h) more modern Homework: - Practice making the same dialogue with your friends and practice making a plan to go somewhere with your friends - Prepare Unit : LISTEN - * Feedback Teaching Date :07/12/2012 Period 39 Unit Lesson : speak and listen A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk how to send parcels or letters II Language contents: Vocabulary: some words of post office Grammar: III Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalk , lesson plan, posters B/ Procedure: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: - Two Ss to go to the board to read the dialogue - Two others to go to the board to exercises,Using the present perfect with “since” and “for”: The Robinsons / live / Hn / 2001 => They / be / Nha Trang / days => -> Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students,activities * Warm up : + Chatting - Show a letter and ask Ss some questions + What is this ? + Where can I post it to my friend ? + How can I post it ? Play game + How much ? ( whole class ) + Is it more expensive when I send a parcel ? + Have you ever sent a letter or a parcel ?  Lead in the new lesson * Presentation : + Pre- teach vocabulary : - air – mail : letter or parcel sent by air Listen and repeat chorally , - surface mail : letter or parcel sent by bus , train or ship … - Parcel ( n) buu pham buu kien - charge (v / n ) : le phi, cuoc phi * Checking : Rub out and remember * Practice: **A/ Speak: + Reading comprehension - Set the scene “ Mrs Kim wants to send a parcel to Qui Nhon , so she has to go to the post office ” - Give Ss some questions and ask Ss to work in pairs to compare their answers - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and find out the answers a Does Mrs Kim send the parcel airmail or surface mail ? Why ? b What is the weight of her parcel ? c How much does she pay ? - Call on Ss to ask and answer the questions * Answers : a Mrs Kim send the parcel surface mail because it is much cheaper b Her parcel is five kilograms c She pays 19, 200 dongs ** Practice : - Call on a student to play role of Mrs Kim and practice the dialogue with teacher ( clerk ) - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue Correct their pronunciation - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of class * Further practice : - Set the scene and ask Ss to make the dialogue + Mrs Lan wants to post a letter air mail - Ask Ss to make the dialogue between Lan and the clerk in the post office - Elicit and encourage Ss to make the dialogue themselves Expected dialogue Clerk : Can I help you ? Mrs Lan : I want to send a letter to Kontom Clerk :Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ? Mrs Lan : I send it airmail How much is it ? Clerk : Let me see Mmm , 15 grams , it is only 1,200 dongs individually Copy down ( whole class ) Play game Listen carefully Work in pairs Read the dialogue to fine out the answers Practice asking and answering the questions Practice the dialogue with teacher Work in open pairs Work in closed pairs Practice the dialogues , using the situations ( whole class ) Work in pairs Mrs Lan : Here you are Clerk : Thank you - Get Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs - Give Ss some situations : Postcard / HCM city / airmail / 15 g Parcel / Ca Mau ? air mail / kg Parcel / Buon Me Thuot / surface / kgs - Divide class into groups , each prepares a dialogue - Call on pairs from each group to practice their dialogue - Get Ss to work in pairs , practicing three dialogues and move around class to help Ss B/ Listen: Prediction *Pre - listening : - Set the scene “ Na is new in the neighborhood She is talking to Nam about what she is going to on the weekend ” - Ask Ss to listen to the tape twice and give the answers and fill in the blanks in each advertisement * While - listening : + Listening task : - Let Ss listen to the tape twice and give the answers - Give feedback a The new comer b Town Ground c English speaking contest d Culture House Listening task : - Ask Ss to read the statements in the exercises 2/66 - Get Ss to guess which is true , which is false which has no information - Ask Ss to share their ideas with their friends - Give feedback - Let Ss listen to the conversation again n and tick in the correct boxes : True ? False or No information + Comprehension questions - Ask Ss some questions to check their understanding of the conversation - Turn on the tape again a Does Na like movies ? b Why will not she go to see the film “The New comer “ ? c Why will not Na go to the photo exhibition ? d Who will Na go to the soccer match with ? e What time does the match start ? * Post - Listening : - Ask Ss to work in groups to talk to their friends Work in groups Work in open pairs Work in closed pairs Listen and copy Listen and copy Work individually Work individually Work in pairs Listen to the conversation again and tick in the corrects boxes Practice asking and answering the questions ( whole class ) - Work in pairs - Answer the questions about what Na is going to this weekend - Call on some volunteers from each group to tell the whole class about Na Work in group Talk about What Na is going to this weekend * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson * Homework : Copy the three dialogues in their notebooks Prepare the next lesson - Ss copy down - * Feedback Preparing date: / / 2015 Teaching Date : / /2015 Period 42 Unit Lesson : listen A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk how to send parcels or letters II Language contents: 1.Vocabulary: some words of post office 2.Grammar: III Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalk , lesson plan, posters B/ Procedure: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: - Two Ss to go to the board to read the dialogue - Two others to go to the board to exercises,Using the present perfect with “since” and “for”: The Robinsons / live / Hn / 2001 => They / be / Nha Trang / days => -> Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students,activities * Warm up : + Chatting - Show a letter and ask Ss some questions + What is this ? + Where can I post it to my friend ? + How can I post it ? Play game + How much ? ( whole class ) + Is it more expensive when I send a parcel ? + Have you ever sent a letter or a parcel ?  Lead in the new lesson * Presentation : *Pre - listening : Listen and copy - Set the scene “ Na is new in the neighborhood She is talking to Nam about what she is going to Listen and copy on the weekend ” - Ask Ss to listen to the tape twice and give the answers and fill in the blanks in each advertisement * While - listening : Work individually + Listening task : - Let Ss listen to the tape twice and give the answers - Give feedback a The new comer b Town Ground c English speaking contest d Culture House Listening task : - Ask Ss to read the statements in the exercises 2/66 - Get Ss to guess which is true , which is false which has no information - Ask Ss to share their ideas with their friends - Give feedback - Let Ss listen to the conversation again n and tick in the correct boxes : True ? False or No information + Comprehension questions - Ask Ss some questions to check their understanding of the conversation - Turn on the tape again a Does Na like movies ? b Why will not she go to see the film “The New comer “ ? c Why will not Na go to the photo exhibition ? d Who will Na go to the soccer match with ? e What time does the match start ? * Post - Listening : - Ask Ss to work in groups to talk to their friends about what Na is going to this weekend - Call on some volunteers from each group to tell the whole class about Na * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson * Homework : Copy the three dialogues in their notebooks Prepare the next lesson - * Feedback Work individually Work in pairs Listen to the conversation again and tick in the corrects boxes Practice asking and answering the questions ( whole class ) - Work in pairs - Answer the questions Work in group Talk about What Na is going to this weekend - Ss copy down Preparing date: / / 2015 Teaching Date : / /2015 Period 43 Unit : Lesson : Read A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the passage about a new shopping Mall - Develop Ss reading skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: Some words of shopping Gammar: The present perfect tense III Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette , chalk , board , posters and lesson plan B / Procedure: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up : - Ask Ss to go to the board to answer some questions say about contents of the last lesson T corrects and give them marks III New lesson : Teacher’sofactivities Students,activities The convenience the new shopping *Warm up : Guessing mall the words - Give Ss the definitions and get Ss to find out the words as quickly as possible a place where you can buy everything A place where you can buy vegetables and fruit Play game A place where you can buy books ( whole class ) A place where you can come to eat A place where you can come to see the movies A person who comes to the store and buys something => Lead in the new lesson ** Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the Listen and copy passage reading and some new words to Ss : * Pre – teach vocabulary : - a roof ( picture ) Listen and repeat chorally , - convenient = thuËn lîi individually - a selection = a process of choosing carefully - available = sẳn có để dùng , có thể để dùng Copy down - a mall = many stores , restaurants , even movies theaters are under one roof - a resident = c d©n Play games * Checking vocabulary : What and where * Brainstorming : - Set the scene “ In Nam,s neighborhood , there is a Listen and the task new shopping mall - Ask Ss to think about the convenience of the mall  Possible answers : - wide selection of goods - lower prices / buy many things at the same * Feedback Preparing date: / / 2015 Teaching Date : / /2015 Period 44 Unit : Lesson : Write A / Objectives; I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a notice Develop Ss’ Writing skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: hardware store, contact…… Grammar: III.Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan B/ Procedure: I Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: - Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book - Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities *Warm up : * Chatting Have you ever written a notice ? To whom ? What for ? What type ? => Lead in the new lesson * Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and the scene “ The residents and store owners on Tran Phu Street are going to hold a meeting to discuss the effects of the new mall “ * Pre- teach vocabulary : - effects (n) = tác động , tác dụng , hiệu qủa - contact (v) = liªn l¹c - hardware store = cửa hàng bán đồ sắt * Guiding questions a Why are the residents and store owners on Tran Phu street going to hold a meeting ? b When will they hold a meeting ? What time ? c Where will they hold the meeting ? - Get Ss to read the notice and answer some questions to check their understanding - Call on some pairs to practice asking answering the questions - Give feedback a To discuss the effects of the new mall b They will hold the meeting on May 20 at p.m c They will hold the meeting at 12 Hang Dao Street , Students,activities Play game ( whole class) Listen and copy - Repeat in chorus Work in pairs Read individually Practice asking and answering the questions Binh ,s hardware store - Let Ss know how to write a notice , not write full sentences * Reading : - Ask Ss to read the passage and ask some questions to check their understanding , get them to use short answers What is the English Speaking club going to hold ? Where and when will it be held ? What time ? Who is the person contact ? - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions * While -writing : - Get Ss to write the notice individually - Monitor and help them write - Ask Ss to share with their partners - Check some notices and correct them - Write the model notice on the board Suggested answers : The school English Speaking club Holding A Speaking Contest to celebrate teacher,s day Date : November 15 Time : 7.30 pm to 10.oo pm Place : Hall 204 , Building G Please contact Ms Tran Thi Thu Hang of class 8H at the above address for more information *Post - writing : - Ask Ss to write one notice about their class meeting - Get them to work in group - Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of class - Give feedback * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson *Homework : Write the completed notice in their notebooks Do exercises in workbook - * Feedback Work in the whole class Ss to read the passage and ask some questions to check their understanding , get them to use short answers Work in pairs Practice asking and answering the questions Work individually Work in pairs Whole class Read the correct notice Ss to write one notice about their class meeting Work in group - Retell the main points Listen and copy down homeworks Preparing date: / / 2015 Teaching Date : / /2015 Period 45 A / The aims : Unit Lesson : Language focus 1,2,3,4 I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able topractice present perfect with” for and since” , know and practice comparing with “ like, ( not ) as…… as, ( not) the same, different form……” II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: Present perfect tense, comparing with” like, ( not ) as… as, ( not) the same…… III Teaching aids : Text books , cassette , chalks , boards , lesson plan posters B/ Procedure: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: Two Ss go to the board to make the similar dialogue about to send a letter or parcel - T corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students,activities * Warm up : Matching - Stick a poster of infinitives and Past Participles on the board - Divide the class into teams - Get Ss form teams to go to the board and write Play game each pair of infinitive – past participle ( whole class ) be see collected go worked write each pair of infinitive – past lived seen eat attended participle write been written eaten work attend done live collect gone Answers : be – been ; write – written ; go – gone live – lived ; see – seen ; collect – collected – done attend – attended ;eat – eaten work – worked - Get Ss to repeat in chorus and remember the past Repeat chorally , individually , participles of irregular verbs then copy * Presentation : , - Set the scene “ Na is new in Nam s neighborhood Listen and copy They are talking to each other ” - Give Ss an open dialogue between Nam and Na , then ask them to complete it Na : How long … you … in this neighborhood ? Work in pairs Nam : I here … 10 years Na : Really It is a long time Practice in front of class * Answers : have – lived / have – lived – for - Ask Ss to repeat the dialogue and ask them to practice in pairs => Form : have / has + past participle Listen and copy * Use : to talk about something which started in the past and continues up to the present * Feedback Teaching Date : /12/2012 Unit Country life and city life Period 46 Lesson 1: Getting started Listen and read A / Objectives: I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about the city life and the country life II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: Not only…… But also…… ; comaration III.Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan B/ Procedure: I Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to Ex L.f - T corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students,activities * Warm up : * Chatting - Talk to Ss about life in the city and life in the country by asking some questions Where you live ? Do you want to live in the city ? Why ? Do you want to live in the country ? Why ? => Lead in the new lesson * Pre -reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words * Pre – teach vocabulary : - a relative = uncles , aunts cousins - peaceful = quiet and calm (a) - permanently (adv) : its means existing all the time - accessible = có thể tiếp đợc - medical facilities = c¸c ph¬ng tiÖn y tÕ * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember * Brainstorming ( Getting started ) - Get Ss to talk about city life and country life The words in the box of getting started may help you country life city life Chatting ( whole class ) Listen and copy Listen and repeat chorally Copy down Play game Ss to talk about city life and country life - Play agame in two teams Work in groups  Possible answers : - tall buildings - beautiful views - plenty kinds of goods - fresh food - polluted air - fresh air - traffic jams - friendly - entertainment - peaceful busy ** While – reading : * True / false statements Statements True False Na lives in the city x Na went to a village which has x some relatives lives there The village is very peaceful and x quiet Hoa prefers the city life x - Turn on the tape and ask Ss to work in groups to predict the true / false statements - Call on some Ss to report their predictions and write them on the board - Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Na and Hoa and compare their ideas - Give feedback and get more information - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue * Comprehension questions : - Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions in ex / 73 - Call on some pairs to practice asking answering the questions in front of class - Give feedback a Na has been to Kin Lien village b She was there for the weekend c to her , the countryside is peaceful and quiet and there is nothing to d There is no libraries , no movies , no supermarket , no zoos … e Country life is becoming better Many remote area are getting electricity People can now have things like refrigerators and TV , medical facilities are more accessible - Ask Ss to work in closed pairs **/ Post - reading : *Discussion - Divide the class into groups Two groups include Ss who prefer the city life and the others include Ss who prefer the country life - Ask Ss to work in groups to answer the questions Work in groups to predict Read the dialogue , compare their ideas Practice the dialogue in pairs Work in pairs - some pairs to practice asking answering the questions in front of class Practice asking and answering the questions Work in groups Demonstrate their ideas in front of class - Retell the main points “ Do you prefer the city or the country life ?Why ? “ - Call on pioneers from groups to show their ideas before class Listen and copy down ** Consolidation: - Retell the main points homeworks ** Homework : Learn by heart new words and copy two lines for each word – Copy the answers in their notebooks - Prepare the next lesson - * Feedback Teaching Date : /12/2012 Period 47 Unit : Lesson Speak and listen+ L.F3 A / Objectives: I Teaching points :By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice speaking about the changes with “ become/ get” and the comparative II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: Comparation III Teaching aids : Textbooks , pictures , poster , lesson plan B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students,activities I Organization : - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up : - Asks Ss to exercises : a) Many lakes / rivers / become / dry => Work in group b) Weather / get / worse => - Teacher corrects and give them marks Ss to find out adjectives III New lesson : * Warm up and pre - speaking Word square - Ask Ss to find out adjectives E X P E N S I B Ss to go to the board and circle O A M D N U V E the word they find U B O I S V E A I C D R T R U Y L E T L L A T S M R Y H G I U O N O I S Y F B P T F D E L U Work in the whole class - Ask Ss to work in teams - Ask Ss to go to the board and circle the word they find - The team which circles more words will win the Listen and copy game Modern – dirty – busy – noisy – tall – expensive – beautiful  Setting the scene “ Hoa,s grand father is 78 “ - Five years ago , she was 73 and she was stronger than she is now - Ask Ss to make a sentence about her health Work in pairs => Hoa,s grand father is getting weaker + Form : am / is / are + V-ing - Ss to look at the two pictures on + Use : used to describe changes with get and page 73 and talk to their partners become about the changes of the town **While – speaking : - Ask Ss to look at the two pictures on page 73 and talk to their partners about the changes of the town The words in the box under the pictures may help you - Write the word prompts on the board so that Ss can speak easily - traffic - > busy - sky -> cloudy - houses -> high - city -> beautiful - trees - > green - Get Ss to work in pairs - Monitor and help Ss speak * Possible answers : - The traffic is getting busier - There are more tall buildings and houses - The houses are getting more modern - The town is becoming more beautiful - The streets are becoming cleaner / larger / noisier * Language focus : Ask Ss to practice the dialogue as example S1 : Is the boat to Qui Nhon leaving at 11 30 ? S2 : Is that good fortune ? S1 : That is right S2 : I am very sorry It has been delayed S1 : Oh , no ! S2 : Now , it is leaving at 13 45 - Give them the shipping information and ask them to make similar dialogues ** Language focus : Complete the dialogue.Use the verbs in the present progressive tense - Asks Ss ex in pairs then to go ti the board to rewrite on the board * Post - speaking : - Ask Ss to work in groups and talk about changes in their hometown / neighborhood - Call on volunteer from each group to show their ideas before the class Other groups can add in their ideas * listening: * Pre - listening - Set the scene “ Aunt Hang is talking to Lan on the phone She is coming to visit Lan in Hanoi “ - Ask Ss to predict information in the dialogue - Call on some Ss to report their predictions * While - listening : Ss to work in pairs Ss to practice the dialogue as example Work in group Work individually Ss ex in pairs then to go ti the board to rewrite on the board Listen to the tape to check their predictions Listen again and share their answers with their friends Read their answers aloud Work in pairs to practice the dialogue - Turn on the tape and check their predictions - Let them listen twice and find out the missing words individually - Ask Ss to share their answers with their partners - Call some Ss to read their results Give feedback that this It is where from coming next week arriving Thursday 10 late 11 afternoon 12 speak 13 my 14 get her * LF3 : Present Progressive Tense is used to describe changes with “ get “ and “ become “ * Drill : Prepare six cards of cues a The boys / get / tall b The old men / become / weak c It / become / dark d The weather / get / cold e The students / get / better f The school yard / become / cleaner Consolidation:Retell the main points of this lesson * Homework : Write some sentences , using Present Progressive Tense to describe changes in their school - * Feedback Listen and copy down homeworks - T model first two cues , then whole class repeat chorally , then some Ss read out individually - Give a new cue and go on until most of the Ss in class can remember the structure Teaching Date : /12/2012 Period 48 Unit : Lesson : Read A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the text about one of the social problems II Language contents: Vocabulary: Some words of the city and country Grammar: III Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan B/ Procedure: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up : - Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson -T corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students,activities *Warm up : * Jumbled words - Write the words with disordered letters on the board + Fulentipl -> plentiful + taneru -> nature + loofd -> flood Work in group + roestdy -> destroy + viroped -> provide + suertl -> result Listen and copy down + ciliestial -> facilities - Ask them to write the correct words on the board and repeat chorally , individually => Lead in the new lesson Listen and repeat chorally , * Pre- reading : individually , then copy down - Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss Play game * Pre - teach vocabulary : - rural (adj ) : something deals with the countryside - urban ( adj ) > < rural - strain (n) = sù qóa t¶i Copy down new lesson - typhoon (n) = storm (n) Work individually - drought (n) : hot and dry weather for a long time -( to )struggle = đấu tranh - migrant (n) : a person who moves from one place to another especially in order to find work Work in groups to guess how - (to) increase = t¨ng lªn , t¨ng thªm , Gia t¨ng farmers deal with difficulties * Checking vocabulary : What and where Some Ss to report their * Brainstorming : , - Ask Ss to think of the difficulties of farmer s life predictions and write them on the Possible answers : droughts / the weather / hard work / no vacations / lack of clean water / electricity / insects destroy harvests - Ask Ss to work in groups to guess how farmers deal with difficulties - Call on some Ss to report their predictions and write them on the board Difficulties of farmer s, life *While - reading : - Let Ss listen to the tape and read the text silently to check their predictions - Answer “ What many farmers to solve their problem ? “ => They have to move to the city so that they can get well – paid jobs - Call on some Ss to read the text in front of class * Gap- filling : - Ask Ss to work in pairs o complete summary , using the information from the passage - Call on some volunteers to report their results - Give feedback leaving home city rural city problems schools hospitals problem 10 world - Call on some Ss to read the complete passage aloud *Finding the words - Ask Ss to read the text again and work with their partners - Call them to report their results - Give feedback a rural b plentiful c increase d strain e tragedy f urban *Post - reading : Discussion - Give a situation : If you were a Minister , what would you for farmers ? - Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss * Suggested answers : - build streets , theaters , stadiums in the countryside - build schools , hospitals - provide clean water , electricity , facilities - build factory - Call on volunteers from groups to show their board Demonstrate in front of class Ss listen to the tape and read the text silently to check their predictions - Work individually -Some Ss to read the text in front of class Ss to work in pairs o complete summary , using the information from the passage Listen to the tape and read the text to check their predictions Answer the question Read the text aloud Work in pairs Read their results Read the complete summary Read the text again and the exercise / 75 Read the complete results Work in groups to discuss ideas before the class * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson *Homework : Write things that government should for the rural areas Do exercises in workbook Prepare the next lesson - * Feedback Show their ideas before class Listen and copy Teaching Date : /12/2012 Period 49 Unit : Lesson :W rite A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a letters to their friends about their neighborhood Develop Ss’ Writing skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: some words of the city and country Grammar: The form of the letter III Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities I Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance *Warm up : Revision - Ask Ss to put the outline for an informal letter in the correct order - Prepare cards with outlines on them - Call Ss to hold them and stand in a random order - Ask some other Ss to rearrange them in the correct order - Write the answer on the board and ask Ss to copy II New lesson: Heading - Writer,s address / Date opening - Dear ……… , Body closing *Pre- writing : - Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions - Give feedback *While … writing : - Ask Ss to write letters to friends about their neighborhood - Let them write individually - Have them compare with their partners and correct if they can * Suggested letter : ( Writer,s address) ( Date ) Dear , I live in … , a small town My family has a large Students,activities Work on the whole class Listen and copy down Work in pairs to practice asking and answering the questions Work individually Compare with their partners Ss to write letters to friends about their neighborhood - Works individually house with four rooms and a small garden My sister and I share one bedroom From the bedroom window , I can see a beautiful park with green tress , flowers and a pond we not live far from my school, so I usually walk there In my neighborhood , there is a swimming pool and a beautiful park On the weekend , I often go swimming with my friends Early in the morning , I always jog with my sister around the park But the thing I like best in my neighborhood is the public library near my school There I not only can study and read books but also watch video and learn how to use the computer Do you have a library like that in your neighborhood ? Is there anything interesting in the place where you live ? Write to me I would like to say goodbye now I am looking forwards to hearing from you soon Love , ( Signature ) *Post - writing : * Correction - Choose some letters to correct before class and ask them to read them aloud * Consolidation: - Reteel the main points of the letter *Homework : Write their letters on their notebooks Prepare the next lesson - * Feedback Teaching Date : Exchange their writings to correct Listen and copy Choose some letters to correct before class and ask them to read them aloud - Retell the main points Copy down homeworks /12/2012 Period 50 Unit 8: Lesson 5: Language Focus 1,2,4,5 A / Objectives: I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the present progressive tense to talk about future actions and the comparative and supperlative adjectives.Then exercises in Language focus - Develop Ss’ listening skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: some words of the city and country Grammar: the present progressive tense to talk about future actions and changing with “ become/ get” and the comparative III Teaching aids : Text book , cards , cassette , lesson plan, posters , radio , CD B/ Steps of the lesson : Teacher’s activities Students,activities I, Warm up : * Matching - Prepare eight cards with phrases on them Work in group - Write eight verbs on the board ( play , , watch , go , clean , have , phone , speak ) Ss to stick the cards with phrases - Divide the class into teams besides the suitable verbs - Hand out each team cards * Answers : - Ask Ss to stick the cards with phrases besides the - play table tennis suitable verbs - my homework - The team which is faster is the winner - watch a program => Lead in the new lesson - go to a violin II New lesson: lesson Language focus: - clean the house A The present progressive to talk about future - have a meeting actions - phone my aunt , Mrs ? Repeat the model sentences of the present Hang progressive - speak to Mom - T explains about the present progressive with future meaning Work in pairs to practice the ? Do Ex dialogue - T explains about the ship information Look at the board Ship name: tªn tµu Work in pairs - Ss repeat Destination nơi đến - S + to be + Ving + O Time of the departure: giê khëi hµnh Ss listen carefully and copy Status: t×nh tr¹ng Ss read and make the dialogue Delayed: tr× ho¶n Revised time: giê söa l¹i * Answers : Origin: n¬i xuÊt ph¸t ? Do Ex 2.Complete the dialogues.Use the verbs in a.(0) am watching b,(1)are doing the present progressive tense Ask Ss to work in pair to complete the dialogue c.(2)am watching T gives feedback d.(3)am going B/ Comparative and superlative adjectives e.(4) am cleaning - Remind Ss of the forms of comparative and f.(5)am having superlative adjectives * Comparative : Short adj - er + than + object More long adj + than + object * Superlative : The + short adjective - est Asks Ss to retell the main The most + long adjective structure grammar about the * Irregular adjectives good/ well – better – the best bad – worse – the worst many – more – the most little – less – the least * Ex : Have Ss work in pairs to make comparisons between the city and the country Ex : The air in the country is fresher than in the city - Let each Student read aloud one of the sentences they have made - Give feedback * Ex : Look at the advertisements.Compare the house the villa and the apartment - The house is more expensive than the apartment - The apartment is smaller than the villa - The villa is the oldest home * Consolidation : - Retell the main points * Homework : Copy down the completed dialogue in their notebooks Do exercises in work book and prepare the next lesson - * Feedback forms of comparative and superlative adjectives - One by one Ss work in pairs to make comparisons between the city and the country Each Student read aloud one of the sentences they have made Retell the main points - One by one Listen and copy down homeworks Teaching Date : /12/2012 Period 51: CONSOLIDATION(1) A/ The aims: I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar from unit to unit - Develop Ss’ four skills II language contents: Vocabulary: Voc of unit 1, 2, Grammar: tense, used to…… II Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students,activities I Warm up : * Matching A B Key Work in group play a to Mom 1.b ( teams ) b table tennis 2.g watch c a program 3.c go d a meeting 4.h clean e my aunt , Mrs Hang 5.f have f the house 6.d phone g my homework 7.e speak h to violin lesson 8.a - Call volunteers from teams to the matching II New lesson: Present simple : S + V(es/s)… eg: I go on holiday twice a year Work in pairs * Present simple to talk about general truths - It is used to express an action which is always true Past simple : Answer the questions S + V (ed/ qkbqt)/ was / were + … eg:I missed the train this morning (not) adjective + enough + to – infinitive Eg: He is old enough to see that film She is not clever enough to this thing 4.Talk about intentions with going to : Introduce the form and use of going to - Form : S + be going to + infinitive Work in pairs - Use : express an intention 5.Reflexive Pronouns - > Form : We use I with myself You yourself / yourselves He himself She herself We ourselves They themselves It itself - Emphasis( nhan manh, tam quan trong) pronouns : Used to emphasize a person or a thing Eg : She cut herself John saw himself in the mirror *Ex : Ask Ss to use the suitable verbs in the Present Progressive Tense to complete the exercise - Get Ss to work in pairs - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogues before class and correct => What tense we use in dialogues ? What is the form ? Look at the adverbs of time in the dialogue Are they at present or in the future ? * Present Progressive Tense is used to talk about the future *Ex 2: Ask Ss to practice the dialogue as example S1 : Is the boat to Qui Nhon leaving at 11 30 ? S2 : Is that good fortune ? S1 : That is right S2 : I am very sorry It has been delayed S1 : Oh , no ! S2 : Now , it is leaving at 13 45 - Give them the shipping information and ask them to make similar dialogues *Ex : Present Progressive Tense is used to describe changes with “ get “ and “ become “ * Drill : Prepare six cards of cues a The girls / get / nice b The y/ become / weak c It / become / dark d The weather / get / cold e Mai / get / better f The yard/ become / cleaner - Model first two cues , then whole class repeat chorally , then some Ss read out individually - Give a new cue and go on until most of the Ss in class can remember the structure * Comparative and superlative adjectives - Remind Ss of the forms of comparative and superlative adjectives * Comparative : Short adj - er + than + object More long adj + than + object * Superlative : The + short adjective - est The most + long adjective * Irregular adjectives Work individually Repeat chorally , individually Repeat the form of comparative and superlative adjectives Listen and copy Work in pairs Listen and answer the questions Play game ( whole class ) good/ well – better – the best bad – worse – the worst many – more – the most little – less – the least ●Ex : Have Ss work in pairs to make comparisons between the city and the country Ex : The air in the country is fresher than in the city - Let each Student read aloud one of the sentences they have made - Give feedback *Further practice : - Ask Ss to read the advertisements then ask them some questions to check their understanding + what are advertised ? ( an apartment , a villa and a house ) + How old are they ? ( The apartment is years old , the villa is years old and the house is new ) + How much we pay per month ? ( 900,000 dongs for the apartment , 6,6 million dongs for the house and 7,8 million dongs for the villa ) - Game “ Nought and Crosses “ , using comparative and superlative adjectives old expensive big expensive small hot big beautiful old Eg : - The villa is older than the apartment - The house is more expensive than the apartment * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of some Structure grammar *Homework : 1/Redo all the exercises and copy down 2/ Prepare the next lesson Teaching Date : /1/2013 Ss work in pairs to make comparisons between the city and the country Ss to read the advertisements then ask them some questions to check their understanding - Work in pairs - Some Ss to retell the main structure grammar ] Listen and copy down homework Period 52: CONSOLIDATION ( ) A/ Objectives: I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to grasp (su nam bat dc, su hieu thau.) knowledge they have learnt in the first semester and know how to supplement( bo sung ) what they are short of (tru phi) Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar from unit to unit - Develop Ss’ four skills II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: III Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters B/ Procedures: III New lesson: Teacher’s activities I Warm up : Chatting about daily routine II New lesson: */ Consolidation : Grammar - Ask Ss to repeat the tenses they have learnt in the first semester and write on the board 1.1 The tenses : - Present Simple / - Past simple - Present progressive / - Present perfect - Simple future 1.2 The form of the verbs - Modal verbs : can , could , may might - Gerund ( V- ing ) => used after some verbs such as like / dislike / hate / love / enjoy and prepositions - Have Ss to repeat and copy , then give examples with each one Exercises : - Using the posters with some exercises to show 2.1 Give the correct form of the verbs in the brackets + Ex 7/ 43 ( workbook ) : Infinitive or Gerund + Ex / 46 ( workbook ) : Past simple or Present perfect - Ask Ss to work in pairs - Call on some pairs to practice in front of lass - Ask some Ss to go to the board to write them on the board - Give feedback *Grammar: 1.2 Comparison - Comparative - Superlative - Like - (not) as …… as - (not) the same as - different form 1.2 Direct and indirect speech - Commands - Requests - Advice => S + told + O +(not) to + V … Students,activities Play game Repeat the tenses they have learnt Listen and copy , then give some more examples Listen and copy Repeat and copy Work in pairs to the exercises and exchange their answers with their friends Listen and copy Repeat and give some more examples Exercises : - Ex / 48 ( workbook ) : Comparison - Ex / 33 ( workbook ) / Ex 6/ 51 ( workbook ) + Have Ss work in pairs to all the exercises + Call on some pairs to practice in front of class + Give feedback  Consolidation: - Retel the main points of some Structure grammar  Homework : Redo all the exercises and copy Prepare the test : - Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the brackets - Complete the conversation - Read the passage carefully , then answer the questions below - Supply the correct tense form of the verb in the brackets - Listening comprehension - * Feedback Work in pairs Demonstrate in front of class Copy down Teaching Date : 4/1/2013 Period 53: CONSOLIDATION ( ) I Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand and remember all the old knowledge to practice (Commands, requests and advice in reported speech) II Language contents: Vocabulary: Voca of U6, 7,8 Grammar:Command, requests and advice in reported speech III Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters IV New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students,activities  Warm up : (REVIEW) 5’ Ss Do - Do exercises that T gives out -Ss repeat: - After Ss finish, T checks and gives marks - Commands, requests and  Presentation advices in reported - Ask Ss to repeat the reported speech speech - T listen and emphazises - * Commands, requests :  Practice (20’) S + Asked/ told + O + (not) V Ex 1: Rewrite the following commands and request - * Advice: in reported speech S + said (that) +S + should a “Please take these books to my classroom” She (not) + V told me -Ss copy b “ Can you buy me some soap on your way EX1: home? “My mother asked me a She told me to take those c “Please turn on the radio for me” Ba told Lan books to her classroom b My mother asked me to d “ Cuold you the washing up for me? “ Van’s buy her some soap on my mother asked her way home e “Can you make me some drink?” He asked Lan c Ba told Lan to turn on the f “ Please clean up the room before you leave” radio Her mother asked her d Van’s mother asked her to the washing up for her e He asked Lan to make him EX2: Rewrite Mr Lam’s advice in reported speech some drink a Mr Lam said “Lien should spend more time f Her mother asked her to in learning English” clean up the room before b Mr Lam said “Lan should practice speaking she left English every day” EX2 c Mr Lam said “ Thien should learn more new a Mr Lam said that Lien words by heart” should spend more time in d Mr Lam said “Binh should make a list of new learning English words in alphabetical order” b Mr Lam said that Lan e Mr Lam said “ Van should learn the meaning should practice speaking of the new words in her mother tonger” English every day f Mr Lam said “ Thu should practices reading c Mr Lam said that Thien aloud short stories in English” EX3 Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms a I’ll lend you the book when I’ve finished (read) ……… it b Do you ever go (swim) ……… in the sea? c They suggested (have) …… dinner in an Indian restaurant d Would you like (go) … out for a drink? e Would you mind (close) ……… the window? f I nearly missed (catch) …… the bus  Production - Repeat the contents of the lesson - T asks Ss to answer in dividually  Home work - Learn by heart the structures and redo Exs - Review The rest of all knowledge from U1 to U8 should learn more new words by heart d Mr Lam said that Binh should make a list of new words in alphabetical order e Mr Lam said that Van should learn the meaning of the new words in her mother tonger f Mr Lam said that Thu should practices reading aloud short stories in English EX3 a Reading b.Swimming c.To go d.Closing f.To catch Ss answer and give examples Copy down Period 54 The first semester test A / The aims : I Teaching points : Students will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt form unit 1to unit so that they can supplement what they are short of Students will be able to summarize the basic knowledge they have learnt to the test well II Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization: II Checking up: III Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson - Deliver test papers to Ss I / Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the brackets 2,0 Ps We must be there( at /before/ between /after )7 30 and 15 Vietnamese language is different ( as/like / from /with ) English language She told me ( giving / to give /gave ) you this present Jane is( as/ like /the most / more ) beautiful than her sister ) Mary likes( playing/ plays /played /play )the piano When my uncle was young , he used ( go/ went /going/ to go ) fishing on Sundays He ( left / has left / leaves ) for London a year ago I have known her ( since / for / at / in ) three years II / Complete the conversation : ( 2,0 Ps ) A : Can I help you ? B : I would like ……… this parcel to Hanoi A : Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ? B : I am not sure ……… is airmail ? A : I will have ……… the parcel first Well , two kilograms That will be 9,000 dong B : That is not very cheap But …………… it airmail A : All right III / Supply the correct tense form of the verbs in the brackets : ( 2,0 Ps ) They ( live ) ………… in Hanoi for 20 years My aunt ( not go ) ……… out of her house since she ( buy )……… a color TV The film ( begin ) …………… at 30 pm tonight IV/ Read the passage carefully Then answer the questions below : ( 2,0 Ps ) Chiang Mai is a city in Thailand that has a wonderful night market In the evening , the main street is lined with small stands and shops that sell almost anything you can imagine Some stands sell jewelry or clothing , others sell traditional Thai crafts and still others sell fresh fruit and species It is easy to spend an entire evening just looking at everything If you decide to buy something , you will not be disappointed The prices are very reasonable There are a lot of wonderful attractions in Chiang Mai , but the night market is a favorite for many people Where is Chiang Mai ? What is Chiang Mai famous for ? What can you buy in some stands in Chiang Mai ? Are the prices expensive ? V / Listening comprehension : You are going to listen twice Check (v) the correct box for True or False : ( 2,0 Ps ) Statements True False Ba is younger than Lan Lan is shorter than her brother Both Ba and Lan go to school in the morning They love pop music , reading novels They not lke playing chess and going swimming in summer Ba likes watching war films on TV …………………… The end ………… The second semester Teaching Date : Period 55 /01/2013 Unit : A first aids course Lesson : Getting started +Listen and read A / Objectives: I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know what they would in the situations which require first - aid II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: The present simple tense III.Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Ss’ activitives Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance Whole class , * Warm up : Kim s game ( Getting started ) - Ask Ss to open their books and look at the things Team work on page 80 for 20 seconds Tell them these things - Ss to close their books and go to are often used for first - aid the board to write the names of the - Divide the class into two groups things they have just seen from - Tell them the group having the most right memory English words is the winner - Have them open the books again and go through the words in English * Suggested answers : emergency room sterile dressing medicated oil ice water pack alcohol - Have them discuss and write down what they would in these situations which require first – aid Possible answers : + A girl has a burn on her arm -> Use cold water / ice to ease the pain + A boy has a bad cut on his leg -> Use alcohol / medicated oil / sterile dressing + A girl has a nose bleed -> Use a handkerchief to stop the bleeding / tell her to lie down + A boy has a bee sting -> Use medicated oil … New lesson: *Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words + Pre teach (Vocabulary ): - First- aid: (n) So cuu - (an) ambulance : xe cuu thuong (Pic) - (an) emergence = cap cuu , tinh trang khan cap - unconscious (adj) > < conscious (adj) tinh tao -( to) bleed : chay mau - Sterile dressing (n) : gac vo trung -> Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary in their notebooks * Checking technique: * Slap the board ( Put the new words in Vietnamese on the board ) * Gap filling Prediction - Hang the chart with the paragraph on the board There was an emergency at Lan,s school A student … (1)… off her bike and hit her head on the road She was … (2)… but she cut her head and the …….(3)… was ……(4)… badly Lan telephoned Bach Mai Hospital and asked the nurse to send an ……(5)… to Quang Trung School Lan was asked to keep the student … (6)… while waiting for the ambulance - Ask Ss to predict the words in the gaps * While - reading : - Have Ss open their books , listen to the tape - Whole class Group work of 4/5 Ss -Some groups to give their answers and correct - Copy down new lesson - Repeat in chorus T – Ss Whole class Team work - Ss to go to the board and write their words Individual work T – Ss Groupwork of 4/5 Ss while reading the dialogue , then check their predictions - Give feedback fell conscious cut bleeding ambulance awake * Comprehension questions - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and select the topic covered in the dialogue - Have Ss work in groups to write their answers on a sheet of paper and hand in after finishing - Collect Ss , papers and give feedback : a- b- ce- f * Post - reading : *Role play : - Have Ss in turn play the roles to demonstrate the dialogue * Write - it -up : Ask Ss to write a story using the information from the dialogue - Tell Ss to begin their story with : “ Yesterday there was an emergency at …… “ - Monitor and help Ss with their work * Consolidation: - Retell the main points * Homework : - Learn by heart new words Let Ss the exercises in the workbook (1,2 / 55 ) T – Ss Pair work - Ss to write a story using the information from the dialogue Individual work - Retell the main points - Listen and copy down homeworks Teaching Date : Period 56 /01/2013 Unit : A first aids course Lesson : Speak + Language focus 3, A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make and respond to requests , offers , and promises - Develop Ss’ speaking skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: request, offers, and promises III Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students,activities I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance ● Warm up : * Net work * Situations Situationswhich whichrequire requirefirst first aid aid Possible answers : - have a snake bite / have a burn / have a cut / have a bee sting / have a nose bleed II New lesson : *Pre - speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking and some models sentences * Set the scene : - Ask Ss some questions to elicit the models a I want you to get me a bandage How can I say? b I would like you to come to my party How can I say? c I tell my mother that I will surely finish my work Group work of – 10 students - Ss some questions to elicit the models - Ss repeat or times before writing them on the board ( underline the key words ) - Ss to work out the rules for before bedtime How can I say ? - Have Ss repeat or times before writing them on the board ( underline the key words ) a Will you ( please ) get me a bandage ? b Would you like to come to my party ? c I promise I will finish my homework before bedtime => Concept checking - Get Ss to work out the rules for themselves by asking questions - After formulating the model sentences , elicit some more phrases with the same use from students * To make a request : Would /can / could / Will + you (please) + V…? *Reponses : + Sure / Ok / All right - I am sorry I can / I am afraid not * To make an offer Will / Won,t you Shall I / can I + V … ? Can I Would you like + to + V … ? What can I / get for you ? Can I get you …………… ? *Responses : + Yes , please / That would be nice - No , thank you 1.3 To make a promise I promise I will / I will not ……… I will ……… I promise I promise to ………… *Reponses : I hope / Good / I am glad / Do not forget - Ask Ss to copy down * While - speaking : + Matching : - Hang the chart with the statements on the board - Ask Ss to look at the pictures ( page 82 ) and match the situations with the statements The girl has a burn on her hand The girl has a bad fever The boy has just broken the vase The boy has a headache The boy has a snake bite - Give feedback : 1.a d e b c *Picture Drill : themselves by asking questions T- Ss - Pairs work T – Ss - T – Ss - Pairs work Ss to copy down Ss to look at the pictures ( page 82 ) and match the situations with the statements Whole class Group work of / Ss - Identify the situations in the pictures Picture a) -> request “ b) -> offer / request “ c) -> offer / request “ d) -> offer “ e) -> promise - Ask Ss to work in pairs + Model : Could you give me a bandage , please ? Sure Here you are - Call on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges in front of class * Post - speaking : Pair work ( closed pairs ) - Get Ss in turn to practice all the exchanges - Monitor and correct , encourage Ss to make sentences for themselves - Collect their ideas and write them on the boards * Suggested answers : b A : Can I get you some water / medicine ? B : Yes, please c A : Can I get you some bandage ? B : That would be nice d A : You must have a fever Can I get you some medicine / water ? B : No , I am fine Thank you e A : I promise I will not play soccer in the house again B : I hope so * Language focus + : ● Making requests , offers and promises with will Ex 3: Making requests , offers and promises with will :- Explain the aims of the exercise - Ask Ss to read each situation and work in pairs to complete the dialogue - Give feedback : a Will you open the window , please , Nga ? b will you give it to me , please ? Ex : Work with a partner - Explain the aims of the exercise - Ask Ss to read the example aloud - Have Ss work in pairs to make requests , offers or promises - Give feedback b Will you paint the door , please ? I will paint the door tomorrow c Will you study harder , please ? Ss to work in pairs - Some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges in front of class - Ss in turn to practice all the exchanges - Ss to make sentences for themselves - T – Ss Pair work -Some pairs to practice in front of class - Ss to read all the words in the box Be sure Ss to understand the meaning of them and each situation - Some pairs to read their answers aloud - Retell the main points - Listen and copy down homeworks I will study harder d Will you carry the bag for me , please ? Shall I carry the bag for you ? e Will you hang the washing , please ? Shall I hang the washing for you ? f Will you cut the grass , please ? I will cut the grass for you * Consolidation: - Retell the main points * Homework : Do exercise 3, 4/ 56 ( workbook ) Prepare the next lesson Teaching Date : Period 57 /01/2013 Unit : A first aids course Lesson : Listen A / Objcetives: I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to listen for details about the activities talking place in an emergency room II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: II Teaching aids : Text books , cassette , chalks , boards , lesson plan posters,pictures and a chart B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students,activities I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance Group work 0f 4/5 Ss ● Warm up : Guess from context What action ? - Ask Ss to look at the picture and write out all the Ss the group having the most verbs describing the actions of the people in it right verbs is the winner - Tell Ss the group having the most right verbs is the winner - Give feedback : to drive , wheel / move / push , weight , wait , lie , stand , lean = > Lead in the new lesson - Listen to and copy down new II New lesson: lesson *Pre- listening : Introduce the topic of the listening -Repeat in chorus and some new words * Pre teach vocabulary : - an eye chart ( using picture ) -> eye sight - a parademic : he takes care of patients but he is not T – Ss a doctor nor a nurse - a wheelchair ( using the picture ) Ss copy down -> to wheel ( to push a wheel chair ) - a stretcher ( picture ) - Ss to look at the picture in their - a crutch -> crutches ( picture ) books again and match the letter -> Have Ss copy A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct * Checking technique : What and where words in the box * Matching : - Ask Ss to look at the picture in their books again and match the letter A,B ,C ,D ,E ,F to the correct words in the box - Call on some volunteers from each group to T- Ss / individual work demonstrate in front of class - Give feedback Ss are going to listen to a A -> ambulance D -> eye chart paragraph about the activities B -> wheelchair E -> scale taking place in an emergency C -> crutches F -> stretcher room which contains the words ●While – listening : on the board * Order Prediction - Rub out the letter ( A ,B …) but leave the words Groupwork of 4/5 Ss Teaching Date : 14/01/2014 Period 58 Unit : A first aids course Lesson : Read A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to read for the instructions about some more situations requiring first – aid Ss will be able to know how to use “ in order to , so as to” II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: commants III Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan, chart , picture / drawing , mimes , cardboards B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students,activities Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance ● Warm up : * Bingo Whole class - Ask Ss to give nouns for emergencies which require first – aid and write them on the board ( burn Ss choose any words on the , cut , bee sting , snake bite , fainting , shock , nose board and write them down on a bleed ) piece of paper - Have Ss choose any words on the board and write them down on a piece of paper Individual - call out the words until someone has ticked all the four words and shouts “ Bingo “ ● New lesson: - `Have Ss copy down * Pre – reading : Introduce the topic of reading Repeat in chorus passage and some new words to Ss Pre – teach vocabulary : -(to) lie flat : ( mime / drawing ) -(to) elevate = (to) lift > < (to) lower - (a) victim : a person who needs first aid - (to) overheat : make something too hot T – Ss - Tissue damage(n) : tæn th¬ng m« - Ss to think of what to in these emergency cases - (to) ease : lµm dÓ chÞu, lµm dÞu ®i * Checking technique : Rub out and remember * Network - Draw the network with some examples on the board - Ask Ss to think of what to in these emergency Whole class cases , - Collect and write the students ideas on the bard First - aids Fainting - Ss to go to the board and add the missing information Shock Burns Individual * While – reading : - Have Ss open their books and read the instructions page 83 * Matching : - Ask Ss to read the statements / page 84 and match tree Leadings A , B , C to them Give feedback A -> a , c , e B -> b C -> d * Grid : - Draw the grid on the board - Ask Ss to read the instructions again and fill the information - Call on some Ss to the board to write their answers - Give feedback Cases Do Don,t - Leave the patient - Do not force lying flat him / her to sit , Fainting - Elevate the patients or stand feet or lower his / her head - Give him / her a - Do not cup of tea when he / overheat the Shock she revives victim with blankets or coat - Do not give the victim any food or drink or drug - Cool the burn immediately to minimize the tissue damage - Put the affected part under a running cold tap Burns - Ease the pain with ice or cold water packs - Cover the burned area with a thick sterile dressing - Have Ss copy the grid in their notebooks * Post – reading : - Ask Ss to work in groups to continue discussing how to give first aid And Call on some volunteers from each group to demonstrate in front of class - Ss to read the instructions again and fill the information - Some Ss to the board to write their answers Individual Pair work Group work - Some volunteers from each group to demonstrate in front of class Ss to exchange their answers to correct for each other - Retell the main points * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson * Homework : Let Ss the exercises 6,7 in the workbook Prepare the next lesson *Feedback - Copy down homeworks Teaching Date : 18/01/2013 Period 59 Unit : A first aids course Lesson 5: Write A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to write a thank – you note Develop Ss’ Writing skill II Language contents: III.Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students, activities Warm up: Chatting T: asks some questions Have you ever written a note? What was it about? Ps answer the questions Note: Thanks / greeting / saying goodbye Pre-writing: T: Have you ever written a 1/ Who did Nga write to? letter? 2/ What did Hoa give Nga? T: How many parts are there in Key a letter? What are they? 1/ Nga wrote to Hoa T: Now let’s put these parts in 2/ Hoa gave Nga some flowers a correct order Task 1: Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets - Getting feedback was came While-writing: were am - Asking Ps work in pairs to helped will phone answer the questions Task :matching these given cues with the questions: - Ps discuss in pairs groups a) Tet holiday / birthday / Mother’s Day (2’) b) a flower , a book, some candies - Getting feedback: ask and c) to go to the zoo, to go picnic answer some questions about d) fax / call / write their thanks note e) beautiful / lovely / nice - Each P writes the letter on f) happy / enjoyable / excited the OHT g) next week / next month - Getting feedback - T corrects mistakes Post-writing - Ps write the note individually - T corrects the mistakes next period Homework: - Write a thank you note for a certain occasion - Prepare Unit “LANGUAGE FOCUS 1,2” Teaching Date : 19/01/2013 Period 60 Unit : A first aids course Lesson : Language focus 1,2 A / Objcetives: I Teaching points: By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use “so as to, in order to” to express intention Ss will also be able to us simple future, II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: II Teaching aids : Text books , cassette , chalks , boards , lesson plan posters,pictures and a chart B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students,activities Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance Group work 0f 4/5 Ss ● Warm up : Guess from context What action ? - Ask Ss to look at the picture and write out all the Ss the group having the most verbs describing the actions of the people in it right verbs is the winner - Tell Ss the group having the most right verbs is the winner - Give feedback : to drive , wheel / move / push , *Feedback * Language focus : - Revision the Future simple - Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the dialogue and exchange their roles - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class - Give feedback : will will won,t , Shall will , ll Teaching Date :22/1/2013 Unit 10: Recycling Period 61 Lesson : Getting started Listen and read A / The aims I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to something to protect the environment and save natural resources I Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan ,6 flashcards , a chart B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to Ex L.f - T corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students,activities *Warm up : Brainstorming (Getting started) Reuse plastic bags Ways to reduce the amount of garbage Group work of 4/5 teams - Ss to think of ways to reduce the amount of garbage they produce - Ask Ss to think of ways to reduce the amount of garbage they produce - Deliver posters to Ss , dividing them into groups - Tell Ss to put the posters on the board after they finish and the team having the most good ideas is the winner - Give feedback ( Use cloth bags , use tree leaves to wrap things , make garbage into fertilizer , make vegetable matter into animal food … )  Lead in to new lesson Pre – reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss * Pre – teach vocabulary : - representative (n) = đại diện - to protect = to keep so/ sth safe from danger -> to protect so / sth from so / sth - natural resource (n) : coal mines , oil / gold / mineral deposits - to recycle “ to make sth already used able to be used again - to contact = to communicate with so by telephone or letter -> Have Ss copy * Checking technique : Jumbled words - Stick flashcards with jumbled words on the board tconatc ralnatu psentreretive a ropttce - Ss to put the posters on the board after they finish and the team having the most good ideas is the winner - Copy down new lesson Individual Teacher – Ss ceresoru cyrecel - Ask Ss to rewrite the words in the right order - Tell Ss the first two groups with right words will get points - Correct and give feedback contact – representative – resource natural – protect – recycle *True / false predictions - Set the scene “ A representative from Friends of the Earth , Miss Blake , is talking to the students of Quang Trung School Friends of the Earth shows people how to protect the environment and save natural resources “ - Put the chart with the statements on the board Friends of the Earth is an organization to help Whole class Group work of 4/5 Ss - Put the chart with the statements on the board people make friends with each other Miss Blake asks the students to remember things : reduce , reuse , recycle Reduce means buying the products which are over packed We can not reuse things like envelopes , glass , plastic bottles , old plastic bags Miss Blake says that we should use cloth bags and should not use plastic bags at all Recycling means not just throwing things away but trying and finding another use for them - Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements are true or false - Call on some Ss to read their guesses and write them on the board While – reading : * Checking predictions - Ask Ss to open their books , listen to the tape while reading the dialogue - Call on Ss to correct the false statements - Give feedback False -> an organization to help people True False -> Reduce means not buying … False -> We can reuse things … True True * Comprehension questions : - Ask Ss to look at the questions and work in pairs - Monitor and help Ss with their work - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions - Give feedback a Reduce means not buying products which are over packed b We can reuse things like envelopes , glass , plastic bottles and old plastic bags c Recycle means not just throwing things away Try and find another use for them d We can look for information on recycling things by having a contact with an organization like Friends of the Earth , going to the local library or asking your family and friends e We should not use plastic bags because when we throw them away , they could stay very long and could not be self- destroyed * Post – reading : * Discussion Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements are true or false some Ss to read their guesses and write them on the board Teacher – Ss Ss to look at the questions and work in pairs Pair work Individual Whole class Ss to express their opinions / ideas on this topic Pair work Individual Some Ss Retell the main points of this lesson “How to protect our environment ?” - Ask Ss to express their opinions / ideas on this topic - Write their ideas on the board into a list - Give feedback , correct and hove them copy * Consolidation: -Retell the main points of this lesson *Homework : Write the questions and full answers in your exercise notebook Do the exercises ( 1,2 ) in the Workbook *Feedback Copy down homeworks Teaching Date : 25/1/2013 Period 62 Unit 10: Recycling Lesson 2: Speak + Listen A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice giving and responding to instructions and listening for specific information about making compost - Develop Ss’ speaking and listening skills II language contents: Vocabulary: Voc of recycling Grammar: infinitive commands, modals: should, can III Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities *Warm up : Kim,s game * Possible answers : Used paper , old newspapers , books , cardboard boxes , bottles , glasses , jars , plastic bags , food cans , drinking tins , vegetable matter , clothes , shoes , school bags … * Speak * / Pre- speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking and some new words to students * Pre-teach vocabulary : - Fertilizer (n) : Farmer often use this thing to make their plants or trees grow well -> to fertilize - Compost (n) : What you call the fertilizer made from spoiled food , leaves , vegetable mater ? -> compost heap - Fabric (n) = material - Leather (n) : What are the shoes made of ? + Have Ss copy in their notebooks  Checking technique : Bingo *Dictation list : - Tell Ss they are going to listen to the words for items and put them into the right groups - Draw the table on the words and put them in the right columns - Model some words - Read the words aloud , slowly and jumble them up Students,activities Whole class Team work Teacher – Ss Individual Individual - After listening , ask Ss to work in pairs and give their answers - Read the words again and correct Group Items Paper used paper (old newspaper ,cardboard boxes Glass ( bottles , glasses , jars ) Plastic (Plastic bags , plastic bottles ) Metal ( food cans , drinking tins ) Fabric Clothes ( cloth bags , material ) Leather ( shoes , sandals , schoolbags ) Vegetable Fruit Peels ( vegetable , rotten fruits ) matter *While – speaking : Mapped dialogue : - Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board - Elicit the exchanges from students - Have some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange - After fishing the dialogue , ask a good pair to demonstrate the whole dialogue a Open pairs : - Ask some pairs to practice in front of class b Closed pairs : - Ask Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information with the words in the dictation list - Monitor and correct A B Which group ( Put ( them ) in fabric clothes ) belong to ? What can we with We can ( recycle them ( those clothes ) ? and make them into Is / are ( fruit vegetable paper or shopping matter ) ? bags What will we with That is right (it ) ? We make ( it into compose and fertilizer our field )  Post speaking : *Listening : Multiple choice : - Tell Ss they are going to listen to an expert who gives the instructions to make compost - Ask Ss to open their books and read the multiple choice questions - Have them guess the answers Pair work Ss to work in pairs and give their answers some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange Teacher –Ss Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information with the words in the dictation list Pair work Ss to open their books and read the multiple choice questions Individual - Turn on the tape or times , Ss listen and the exercise - Get Ss to give their answers and correct Answers : a A b B c A d B - Have them copy * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson *Home work : Copy down the dialogue , replacing the information Do the exercises in the work book Prepare the next lesson *Feedback Some Ss Retell the main points of this lesson Copy down homeworks Teaching Date : 26/1/2013 Period 63 A / Objectives: Unit 10: Lesson 3: Read I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the passive in the Present Simple II Language contents: Vocabulary: Voc of recycling Grammar: Passive form, Present perfect III Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word square chart pictures , drawing B/ Procedure: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance Teacher’s activities Students,activities *Warm up : Word square E N V I R O N M E N T N B C G A R B A G E R V E D R D O P P U R E Ss the topic about the E J U E Y I L A R S C environment and there are 12 L U S E D P A P E R Y hidden words O S T N O T S E D E C P R O T E C T R U U L Group work of teams E A B R C A I B C S E R E C E E N C A E E K D E E E F G H G I J L Ss to write their answers on a - Tell Ss the topic about the environment and there piece of paper and hand in when are 12 hidden words they finish - Divide the class into groups - Ask Ss to write their answers on a piece of paper and hand in when they finish Ss the group with the most right - Tell Ss the group with the most right words is the words is the winner winner Answer key : environment , garbage , pure , used paper , protect envelope , dust , green tree , can , plastic , paper bag , reduce , reuse , recycle II New lesson: * Pre – reading :Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students Pre- teach vocabulary : - tire (n) : using picture - pipe (n) : using drawing - deposit (n) : Tiền đặt cọc - to refill = to fill something empty again - to melt >< to freeze - Get Ss to copy in their notebooks * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember *Open prediction T – Ss Whole class *Feedback Teaching Date : Period 64: /0 /2013 Unit 10: Lesson : Write A /Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a set of instructions, using the sequencing Develop Ss’ Writing skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: infinitive, Conj: first, next, then, after that, finally III.Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures drawing, mime , picture B/ Procedure: I Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance *Feedback Teacher’s activities * Warm up : Lucky numbers - Write numbers on he board from to Lucky number Say this sentence in he passive “ people speak English everywhere “ Say this sentence in the active “ cartoons are liked by most children “ Students,activities Team work Teaching Date : 01/02/2013 Period 65: Unit 10: Recycling Lesson : Language focus 1, A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the passive in Present simple / Future simple II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: Passive form” III Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , lesson plan, chart , picture B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students,activities * Warm up : Questions game - Call on a student to go to the board and give him or her a job name - Ask the rest of the class to guess the job by asking Individual yes-no questions - The chosen student can only answer yes or no - Tell someone who can guess the right job will get a point and take the place of the last chosen student Example questions : - Do you get a big salary ? - Do you wear uniform ? * Language focus * The passive forms * Passive Form in the present Simple: S + am/ is / are + Past participle - It is used when the subject is affected by the action of the verb - How to change an active sentence to a passive voice : Active S V O Passive eg : I S + be + PII love Teacher – Ss Pair work by O you Pair work You are loved by me Have Ss copy Exercise * Answers: 1) The glass is broken into small pieces 2) The glass is washed with a detergent liquid 3) The glass pieces are completely dried 4) They are mixed certain specific chemicals 5) The mixture is melted until it becomes a liquid 6) A long pipe is used, dipped into the liquid, then the liquid is blown into intended shapes Exercise 2: Passive Form in the Future Simple S + will / shall + be + past participle - Have Ss copy down - Show Ss the questions ( o) and ask them to fill in the gaps , using the Passive - Call on Ss to give their answers and correct … will be shown Will … be built … ? … will be finished … Will … be made … ? * Consolidation: Ask Ss to tell how to change an active sentence to a passive voice * Homework : Rewrite the letter beginning with : “ Nam,s grandparents are delighted that he passed his English exam ……” Do the exercises in the workbook *Feedback Teacher – Ss Individual Whole class Pair work Teacher – Ss Whole class Individual Listen and copy Teaching Date : 02/02/2013 Period 66: Unit 10: Recycling Lesson : Language focus 3, A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review: - Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: a noun clause: “ It’s + adj + to V” III Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , lesson plan, extra boards B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students,activities * Warm up : Ask ss to play the game “Matching” Three groups play on the stage * Matching: Group work build  built Observe and listen show  showed make  made finish  finished wash  washed dry  dried blow  blown Remark the game and present the new lesson * Language focus * Adjectives followed by an infinitive / a noun clause Teacher – Ss It + be + adjective + to infinitive Example : It is very difficult to speak English well *Complete the sentences - Ask Ss to open their books and complete the dialogues Individual - Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues and correct S + be + adj + that / noun clause Example : We are delighted that you passed the English exam - Get Ss to copy *Complete the letter - Ask Ss to read the letter and match the words A B Key relieved (a) a xin chóc mõng 1.d b trång chê Congratulation 2.a c x¸c định Look forward to d nhÑ nhâm 3.b confirm (v) c - Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary - Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the words in the box - Get some Ss to give their answers - Give feedback and correct * Exercises: are delighted was happy am relieved is afraid Are … sure … am certain - Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson * Homework : - Do the exercises again in the book - Review all vocabulary and grammar - Prerpare for the next period: Unit 11: Getting started + Listen and read *Feedback Whole class Pair work Teacher – Ss Whole class Individual Read the letter aloud Listen and copy Teaching Date : 05/02/2013 Period 67 Unit 11 Traveling around Viet Nam Lesson : Getting started Listen and read A / Objectives: I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use some expressions to express their interest II Language contents: Vocabulary: Traveling words Grammar: I’d like to……? Would you mind + V-ing/ If… did? III Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities I Warm up : Jumbled words - Write the topic “ Places of interest “ on the board Places of interest Students,activities Team work Watch EL TV Ha long bay Nha Rong harbor - Ask each team to connect the words to make the right phrases for places of interest and write them on the board as fast as possible => Ngo Mon Gate , Ha long Bay , The Temple Literature , Nha rong Harbor II New lesson: * Getting Started : - Ask Ss to open their books and match the names with the pictures - Call on some Ss to give their answers a Ngo Mon Gate b Nha rong Harbor c The Temple of Literature d Ha Long Bay - Call some Ss to read the proper names aloud * Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students * Pre- teach Vocabulary : - Crop (n) : something such as grain , rice , fruit … is Individual Listen and copy Teacher – Ss individual and choral grown in one season - Sugar cane (n) : cay mia ( It is used to make sugar ) - Water buffalo (n) : tr©u - forty – minute drive : The drive takes 40 minutes Form : A / an Adj ( number ) – N + N Ex : a – month vacation / a thirteen – year – old – boy * Checking vocabulary : Bingo + Guiding questions : - Set the scene and put the chart with questions on the board a where does Hoa meet The Jones ? b Is it the first time The Jones have visited Viet Nam? c How they travel to Ha Noi ? d What they see along the road to Ha Noi ? e What would Tim like to ? - Ask Ss to think about the questions in a few minutes - Have Ss listen to the tape while reading the dialogue - Get Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions - Call on some pairs to give their answers - Feedback : a Hoa meets The Jones at the airport b Yes , it is c By taxi d They see a boy riding a water buffalo , rice paddies , corn and sugar cane fields e He would like to take a photo * While – reading : - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and say out True or False - Read the sentences aloud and call on some Ss to answer , then have them correct the false sentences and get them to write in their notebooks a T b T d T e T c F -> … in a taxi f F -> … Not only rice and corn but also sugar canes are grown around Ha Noi - Call on some groups of five to practice the dialogue in front of class - Correct their pronunciation * Post – reading : Discussion - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again , discuss with them and ask them to pick out the sentences containing the situations mentioned below * to express interest : - I,d like you to meet my parents … - It is nice to meet you … Whole class Individual Pair work Ss to think about the questions in a few minutes Ss listen to the tape while reading the dialogue Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions Whole class Ss to listen to the tape and say out True or False some groups of five to practice the dialogue in front of class Individual Ss to read the dialogue again , discuss with them and ask them to pick out the sentences containing the situations mentioned below Individual - Retell the main points of this lesson - copy down homeworks - It is great to be in Viet Nam - I would to sit with Tim … * to express a request : - Would you mind sitting in the front seat … - Would you mind if I took a photo ? * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson */ Homework : Learn by heart new words and some structures to give some examples Do the exercises in the workbooks and prepare new lesson *Feedback Teaching Date : /02/2013 Period 68 Unit 11: Lesson : Speak & L F 3,4 A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make and respond to formal requests using “ mind “ and make suggestions - Develop Ss’ speaking skills II Language contents: Vocabulary: Place direction Grammar: Formal request III Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD, a mapped dialogue chart B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students,activities I Warm up : What does it say ? - Choose a student and ask him / her to go to the front of the class with his / her back to the board so that Whole class he / she can not see what is written on the board - Write the information on the board - Ask the rest of the class try to help the student guess what is written on the board by asking questions until he / she says out right the words on the board Example : Yes, I Ss ask : Do you like your teacher ? Or Every day Ss ask : How often you have a shower ? II New lesson : * Pre- speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking and some structures Pre- teach structures : - Set the scene : Remind Ss of the exchanges between Hoa and Mr Teacher – Ss Jones and between Hoa and Tim in the last dialogue and elicit the sentences from Ss Ss of the exchanges between Model sentences : Hoa and Mr Jones and A : Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the between Hoa and Tim in the taxi? last dialogue and elicit the B : No problem sentences from Ss A : Would you mind if I took a photo ? B : Not at all => Used to make and respond to formal requests Form : Would you mind / Do you mind + verb- ing …? Would you mind if I + Verb ( in Past simple) …? Do you mind if I + Verb ( in Present simple ) ? Responses : Ss to copy and give some  Agreement: more examples with suggested No , I not mind / No , of course no / Not at words all / Please / Please go head  Disagreement : I am sorry , I can not / I am sorry , it is impossible I,d prefer you did not / I,d rather you did not - Get Ss to copy and give some more examples with suggested words Cardboard Drill : move your car ? (v ) / go out with me ? ( x) wait for me ? (x) / Get / coffee ? (v) / Smoke ? (x) - Call on some pairs to practice in front of class */ While – speaking : - Ask Ss to work in pairs + Open pairs : Get or pairs to demonstrate the exchanges + Close pairs : get the whole class to practice all the exchanges - Give feedback Mapped dialogue You Tourist officer Excuse me ! Yes ? I would like to visit a market Would you Not at all mind suggesting one ? How about goping to Thai Binh Market ? That sounds It opens from about interesting Thank am to pm you You are welcome + Open pairs: Ask some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue + Closed pairs : have Ss open their books and use the information / 101 to practice other dialogues Group : Markets Group : Museums Group3 : Restaurants Group : Stamps Group : Zoo and Botanical Garden * Post – speaking : - Call on some volunteers from each group to practice in front of class - Rewrite the completed dialogues in their note books * Consolidation: * Language focus : a, Presentation : - Ask Ss to repeat the models sentences : Would you mind if + Verb ( in Past simple tense …) ? Do you mind if + Verb ( in present simple tense …) ? Do you mind / would you mind + verb – ing …? + Agreement : No , I not mind / No , of course not / Not at all / Please / Please go ahead - Disagreement : I,d prefer you did not / I,d rather you did not Whole class - Some pairs to practice in front of class Ss to work in pairs Pair work Teacher – Ss Pair work some volunteers from each group to practice in front of class -Retell the main points of this lesson Individual Teacher – Ss + Open pairs : Get or pairs to demonstrate in the class Whole class => Meaning : Xin ban cam phien … - Get Ss to copy b) Practice : Cardboard Drill - Prepare cardboards with cues including checks (v) and crosses (x) a move / car (v) c get / coffee (x) b put out / cigarette (v) d wait / moment (x) Model : T : Would you mind moving your car ? Ss : No , of course not - Call on or Ss to repeat it and correct + Open pairs : Get or pairs to demonstrate in the class + Closed pairs : Get the whole class to practice - Go on until the last cue * language focus : + Gap fill - Put the gap – fill chart on the board - Ask Ss to use the right words in the box to fill in the gaps turned off – explain – telling – ask Would you mind …… me something about it ? Do you mind if I …… you a question ? Would you please … this new word to me ? Would you mind if I … the television ? Answer Key : 1.telling 2.ask 3.explain turned off + Ordering pictures - Ask Ss to write the numbers and look at the pictures , listen to the situations and order the pictures ( 1-> ) turn on the stereo watch TV while eating sit down postpone the meeting turn on the air – conditioner smoke - Ask Ss to give their answers 1.d 2.f 3.a 4.c 5.e 6.b - Get Ss to work in pairs , playing the roles to demonstrate the exchanges based on the models below the pictures Listen and correct their mistakes Ss to use the right words in the box to fill in the gaps Teacher – Ss Pair work Individual Whole class Ss to work in pairs , playing the roles to demonstrate the exchanges based on the models below the pictures Listen and correct their mistakes Pair work -Retell the main points of this lesson * Homework : Do the exercises in the workbook Prepare the next lesson - Ss copy down *Feedback Teaching Date : /02/2013 Period 69 Unit 11: Lesson : Listen & L F 1, A / Objectives: I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to listen and match the places in the box to their correct positions on the map Ss will be able to use Present and Past participles to describe things and people II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: - ed and - ing participles II Teaching aids : Text books , cassette , chalks , boards , lesson plan posters,pictures and a chart B/ Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students,activities I Warm up : Quiz what is this place ? - Ask questions and call the student who puts his / her hand up first to answer - Tell Ss each place consists of questions ; points for the first question , points for the second question Individual , point for the third question a What is this place ? Ss each place consists of it is called the city of Eternal Spring questions ; points for the first It has a lot of waterfalls and lakes question , points for the You can find the most kinds of flowers here b What is this place ? It is a seaside resort It has a very big monument of Buddha It has an Oceanic Institute c What is this place ? It is a mountainous resort It has tribal villages Sometimes it has snow d What is this place ? It is recognized as a World Heritage Site by UNESSCO It has a lot of caves It contains of a lot of islands *Key : a Da Lat b Nha Trang c Sa Pa d Ha Long Bay => Lead in the new lesson II Pre- listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words + Pre – teach vocabulary : - Highway ( n) - Tourist information center (n) + Set the scene “ The Jones family are going around Ha Noi and they are talking about the directions to places in the maps Listen to them and match the places to the correct positions on the maps “ - Have Ss guess their correct positions on the map - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board III While – listening : - Ask Ss to list the places on the maps - Play the tape or times - Ask Ss to compare their answers with their friends - Call on some Ss to read their answers and give the correct answers Answer key : a) restaurant b) hotel c) bus station d) pagoda e) temple - Play the tape once more to check the answers ( pause at some important paragraph ) IV Post – listening : - Have Ss repeat chorally while listening to the tape - Correct their pronunciation * Language focus 1+2: Language focus : - Ask Ss to open their books and look at the picture / second question , point for the third question Individual Ss guess their correct positions on the map Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board Teacher – Ss Whole class Work in group Individual Pair work Individual Ss to open their books and look at the picture / 108 and set the scene “ It is time for recess and the people at Quang Trung school are in the school yard What are they doing ? “ 108 and set the scene “ It is time for recess and the people at Quang Trung school are in the school yard What are they doing ? “ - Ask questions and call on Ss to answer then correct T : What is Mr Quang doing ? Ss : He is walking / going up the stairs T : What is Miss Lien doing ? Ss : She is carrying a bag ……  Model sentences : The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang Whole class Listen and copy Ss to open their books and look at the picture / 108 and set the scene “ It is time for recess and the people at Quang Trung school are in the school yard What are they doing ? ( present participle phrase ) Form : Verb + ing -> Present participle Use : A present participle can be used as an adjective to qualify a noun with active meaning - Have Ss copy * Practice : - Ask Ss to work in pairs to say who each person is , using the information above Example : The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang - Correct and feedback Language focus : * Matching - Ask Ss to look at the words in the box and the picture / 109 to the matching A B Key box a wrap in f truck b dress in c lamp c recycled from e doll d keep in b flowers e made in a toys f paint d - Ask Ss to look at the picture / 109 again and answer the questions : - Where is the old lamp made in ? - What color is the box painted ? - What is truck recycled from ? - What color is the doll dressed in ? - What are the flowers wrapped in ? - Where are the toys kept ? - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions => Ask “ How much is the old lamp made in China ? Ss to look at the words in the box and the picture / 109 to the matching Ss to look at the picture / 109 again and answer the questions : some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions Ss to look at their books , listen to the questions and answer Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering the questions ( Using the information in the matching ) - Call on some pairs to Model Sentences : The old lamp made in China is five dollars ( past participle phrase ) demonstrate for the class Retell the main points of this lesson Individual Form : Regular verb + ed Past participle Irregular verb Use : a past participle can be used as an adjective to qualify a noun with passive meaning - Have Ss copy * Practice : - Ask Ss to look at their books , listen to the questions and answer * T : How much is the box painted green ? St: The box painted green is one dollar - Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking and answering the questions ( Using the information in the matching ) - Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class * Consolidation: - Retell the main points * Homework : - Ss copy down Learn by heart new words Prepare the next lesson *Feedback Teaching Date : 23/02/2013 Period 70 Unit 11: Lesson : Read A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to get the information from simple tourist advertisements II Language contents: Vocabulary: tourist vocabulary Grammar: Ed/ ing participles III Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word square chart pictures , drawing B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students,activities I Warm up : Word square Tourist sites Y R E S T G B E R Y S A I M K S B V B I E S L D L A K E N T A I A T R A E F G X A D D O R T D C A A C H K N L P A E B U A A P C A H T P J I C A V K I T H L N C T A M O U N R D A N H N G E A G G C U L *Answer Key : resort , beach , Sa Pa , caves , lakes mountains , Nha Trang Bach Ma , Ha Long , Da lat , Tribe Seaside , The citadel II New lesson: *Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students + Pre – teach vocabulary : - accommodation (n) : a place to live , work or stay in - giant (adj ) = huge / very big - slope (n) - jungle (n) = a very thick forest - limestone (n) = đá vôi - florist (n) : a person who sells flowers Team work Ss to find 13 hidden words and write them on a piece of paper Individual Teacher – Ss Teaching Date : /0 /2013 Period 71 Unit 11: Lesson 5: Write A / Objectives: I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to write a narrative , using a guided composition Develop Ss’ Writing skill II Language contents: Vocabulary: Grammar: The simple tense; Conjunctions; adverbs of time III Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters B/ Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students,activities I Warm up : Which word ? ( Get Ss to study the definition of a narrative by a gap fill ) - Put the missing words on the board and have Ss study first :written – climax – attention – brief – events - Show the chart and ask Ss to ill in the gaps with the Group work of 4/5 Ss words in the box - Ask Ss of each group to go to the board and write Ss of each group to go to the the words as fast as possible board and write the words as - Explain the definition in Vietnamese fast as possible Answer key : S events written climax attention brief II New lesson: * Pre- writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words to Ss Pre – teach Vocabulary - canoe (n) : using picture - to paddle (mime ) -> paddle (n) - to hire : thuê mướn - to overturn : lật úp / lật đổ - to rescue = to save somebody ,s life from danger + Get Ss to copy down * Checking vocabulary : Slap the board Ss * Ordering statements : Setting the scene “ Last week , while on vacation in Da lat , The Jones family had quite an unforgettable adventure on Xuan Huong Lake What did they and what happened to them ? Teacher – Ss “ - Ask Ss to read the first part of the story / 105 and rearrange the sentences / 106 to complete the story - Get some Ss to read the story aloud for the class and correct pronunciation errors - Give feedback : c -> a -> g ->d -> f -> b -> e *While – writing : Explanation : - Have Ss look at the pictures / 106 – 107 and guess the meaning of the new words - Explain the meanings of these words + to stumble : trượt chân / + to go off : văng + to realize : nhận - Get Ss to copy Ordering pictures :Ask Ss to look at the pictures again and rearrange the events in the correct chronological order to make it a story - Call on some Ss to give their answers and correct - Give feedback : d -> b -> e -> h -> a -> f -> c -> g Write – it – up : - Ask Ss to use the pictures already rearranged and the given words to write the story about Uyen - Monitor and help Ss with words or structures while they are writing * Notice : The past simple tense is often used in a narrative - Ask them to exchange their writings to correct for each other - Call on some Ss to read their story aloud for he class - Give feedback : Uyen had a day to remember last week she had a math exam on Friday but she got up late She realized her alarm clock did not go off As he was leaving home , it started to rain heavily Uyen tried to run as fast as she could Suddenly she stumbled against a rock and fell onto the road Her school bag went into a pool of water and everything got wet Strangely , the rain stopped as she got to her classroom Luckily , Uyen had enough time to finish her exam * Post – writing : - Call on some Ss to demonstrate the completed story in front of class - Copy the story in their notebooks * Consolidation: -Retell the main points of this lesson Whole class Teacher – Ss some pairs to give their answers and correct Ss to read the story aloud for the class and correct pronunciation errors Pair work Ss to look at the pictures again and rearrange the events in the correct chronological order to make it a story Teacher – Ss Whole – class Individual Individual Ss to demonstrate the completed story in front of class Individual Retell the main points of this lesson Individual Individual * Homework : Learn by heart all new words and copy in their notebooks Work in groups of writing a story to tell the class in the next lesson Prepare the next lesson Teaching Date : /0 /2013 Period 72 Consolidation A/ Objectives: I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points and vocabulary from Unit to Unit 11 II language contents: Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme “personal information” Grammar: - Future simple tense to talk about near future and make requests, offers and promises - “ in order to / so as to” - Passive forms in commands and future simple - Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause - “mind” to make requests - “ed” and “ing” participles III Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters B/ Steps of the lesson: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Warm-up Listen and answer Say hello to the students How are you? Today we’re going to review the main grammar points and vocabulary from unit to unit 11 * Review Ask ss to retell the use, forms of future Listen and retell simple Make requests with “will” Divide the class into groups and ask ss Three groups make and show out their sentences discuss to make examples Remark and correct Ask the class to retell the use of “ in order to / so as to” and make examples on the “ in order to / so as to” board Eg: Remark and correct She goes to the market to/ so as to/ in order to buy some flowers Ask the class to retell the forms of the passive verbs and make examples on the Passive forms in commands and future simple board Eg: Glass is broken into small pieces Remark and correct Trees are cut down The house will be paiinted Ask the class to retell the use, form of adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause and make examples on the board Remark and correct Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause Eg: It is easy to learn English He is happy that she is fine Ask the class to retell the use, form of “mind”and make examples on the board “mind” to make requests - Do/ Would you mind if I V/ VP1…? Remark and correct - Would/ Do you mind + V(ing)…? Eg: - Do/ Would you mind opening the window? - Not at all - Do you mind if I sit here? - Please Or - Would you mind if I sat here? - Please Ask the class to retell the use of - “ed” and “ing” participles Ask ss to make examples on the board Remark and correct “ed” and “ing” participles Listen and answer Eg: The boy reading a book is Ba The doll made in China is dollars *Consolidation: Listen and answer Ask ss to tell the main grammar points that thay have to review * Homework Review from unit to unit 11 to prepare for the next lesson: Test 45 minutes WRITTEN TEST 3-A Time: 45 minutes Full name: ………………………………………………………… Class:8 ……………… I.Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others.(1p) a happened b helped c burned d bored a fields b plants c trees d newspapers a learned b played c cooked d ruled a mind b window c find d tidy II.Choose the best answer and circle the best letter A, B, C or D(2p) Would you mind for a few minutes? A to wait B wait C waiting D waited The red car by the doctor is my neighbor A buy B to buy C buying D bought It’s nice your family A to meeting B to meet C met D meet In order _ good marks in this test, you must revise your lesson carefully A getting B gets C get D to get This house last week by Mr Smith A was painted B was paint C was paints D painting It’s to find a modern hotel in our disdict A difficulty B more difficult C difficult D most difficult - to America yet ? A Have you ever been B Were you been C Were you D Are you Do you mind if I here? A sitting B sat C to sit D sit III Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms: (2p) Would you mind ( play ) the piano ? We learn harder so as ( get ) _ good grades It is very interesting ( read ) _ newspaper through the Internet They (build) _this house since last monh IV-Read the following passage carefully, then answer the questions:(2p) It was the first time Jim went to Ho Chi Minh City with his parents When the plane landed at Tan Son Nhat Airport, the day was fine There was a bright sun, the sky was cloudless and blue It is said that Ho Chi Minh City is the city of sunshine The family took a taxi to the Rex Hotel, a very big hotel in the center After checking in, they went upstairs to their room on the fifth floor Jim was eager to see the sights of the city Through the window of the bedroom, he could see beautiful pictures of Ho Chi Minh City It was marvellous to see the city sparkling in colorful lights at night Jim visited many places of interest such as Nha Rong Harbor, Dam Sen Park, Suoi Tien and Sai Gon Water Park Ho Chi Minh City is famous for shopping malls Jim bought a lot of souvenirs for his friends at Sai Gon Tourist Trade Center The next evening the family walked along the streets, then came into a well-known vegetarian restaurant to enjoy delicious food It was really wonderful *** Questions: 1-Who did Jim go to Ho Chi Minh City with? …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-Which places did he visit? ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-What did he buy at Sai Gon Tourist Trade Center? ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-Have you ever been to Ho Chi Minh City? …………………………………………………………………………………………………… V.Rewrite the following sentences, beginning and shown: (3P) 1.Shall I close the windows? =>Do you mind if ……………………………………………………… 2.Could you translate this sentence into Vietnamese? =>Would you mind …………………………………………………… 3.I will repair your bicycle tomorrow =>Your bicycle …………………………………………………………… 4.The girl is my classmate She is talking with Miss Lan (dùng dạng phân từ (V-ing) để viết lại câu ) =>The girl ……………………………………………………………………… 5.I started painting the house two hours ago =>I ………………………………………………………………………… 6.The car was made in Japan The car was very expensive.(quá khứ phân từ (PP) để viết lại các câu ) => …………………………………………………………………… WRITTEN TEST 3-B Time: 45 minutes Full name: ………………………………………………………… Class:8 ……………… I.Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others.(1p) a learned b played c cooked d ruled a mind b window c find d tidy a happened b helped c burned d bored a fields b plants c trees d newspapers II.Choose the best answer and circle the best letter A, B, C or D(2p) In order _ good marks in this test, you must revise your lesson carefully A getting B gets C get D to get This house last week by Mr Smith A was painted B was paint C was paints D painting It’s to find a modern hotel in our disdict A difficulty B more difficult C difficult D most difficult - to America yet ? A Have you ever been B Were you been C Were you D Are you Do you mind if I here? A sitting B sat C to sit D sit Would you mind for a few minutes? A to wait B wait C waiting D waited The red car by the doctor is my neighbor A buy B to buy C buying D bought It’s nice your family A to meeting B to meet C met D meet III Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms: (2p) It is very interesting ( read ) _ newspaper through the Internet They (build) _this house since last monh Would you mind ( play ) the piano ? We learn harder so as ( get ) _ good grades IV-Read the following passage carefully, then answer the questions:(2p) It was the first time Jim went to Ho Chi Minh City with his parents When the plane landed at Tan Son Nhat Airport, the day was fine There was a bright sun, the sky was cloudless and blue It is said that Ho Chi Minh City is the city of sunshine The family took a taxi to the Rex Hotel, a very big hotel in the center After checking in, they went upstairs to their room on the fifth floor Jim was eager to see the sights of the city Through the window of the bedroom, he could see beautiful pictures of Ho Chi Minh City It was marvellous to see the city sparkling in colorful lights at night Jim visited many places of interest such as Nha Rong Harbor, Dam Sen Park, Suoi Tien and Sai Gon Water Park Ho Chi Minh City is famous for shopping malls Jim bought a lot of souvenirs for his friends at Sai Gon Tourist Trade Center The next evening the family walked along the streets, then came into a well-known vegetarian restaurant to enjoy delicious food It was really wonderful *** Questions: 1-Did Jim go to Ho Chi Minh City with his parents? …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-What did he buy at Sai Gon Tourist Trade Center? ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-Which places did he visit? ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-Have you ever been to Ho Chi Minh City? …………………………………………………………………………………………………… V.Rewrite the following sentences, beginning and shown: (3P) 1.The girl is my classmate She is talking with Miss Lan (dùng dạng phân từ (V-ing) để viết lại câu ) =>The girl ……………………………………………………………………… 2.I started painting the house two hours ago =>I ………………………………………………………………………… 3.The car was made in Japan The car was very expensive.(quá khứ phân từ (PP) để viết lại các câu ) => …………………………………………………………………… 4.Shall I close the windows? =>Do you mind if ……………………………………………………… 5.Could you translate this sentence into Vietnamese? =>Would you mind …………………………………………………… 6.I will repair your bicycle tomorrow =>Your bicycle …………………………………………………………… Teaching Date : 02/03 /2013 Test( no ) Period 73 A / The aims : I Teaching points : Students will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt form unit to unit 11 so that they can supplement what they are short of II Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization: II Checking up: III Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson - Deliver test papers to Ss *- Ma trËn: NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiÓu VËn dông Chủ đề Tæng sè: TN TN TL TL TN TL 4 1,0 1,0 I Phonetic II Reading III Language focus IV Writing Tæng sè: 2,0 2,0 2,0 3,0 10 4,0 12 4,0 2,0 Number I.Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others.(1p) a happened b helped c burned d bored a fields b plants c trees d newspapers a learned b played c cooked d ruled a mind b window c find d tidy II.Choose the best answer and circle the best letter A, B, C or D(2p) Would you mind for a few minutes? A to wait B wait C waiting D waited The red car by the doctor is my neighbor A buy B to buy C buying D bought It’s nice your family A to meeting B to meet C met D meet In order _ good marks in this test, you must revise your lesson carefully 2,0 12 4,0 3,0 26 10 A getting B gets C get This house last week by Mr Smith A was painted B was paint C was paints D to get D painting It’s to find a modern hotel in our disdict A difficulty B more difficult C difficult D most difficult - to America yet ? A Have you ever been B Were you been C Were you D Are you Do you mind if I here? A sitting B sat C to sit D sit III Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms: (2p) Would you mind ( play ) the piano ? We learn harder so as ( get ) _ good grades It is very interesting ( read ) _ newspaper through the Internet They (build) _this house since last monh IV-Read the following passage carefully, then answer the questions:(2p) It was the first time Jim went to Ho Chi Minh City with his parents When the plane landed at Tan Son Nhat Airport, the day was fine There was a bright sun, the sky was cloudless and blue It is said that Ho Chi Minh City is the city of sunshine The family took a taxi to the Rex Hotel, a very big hotel in the center After checking in, they went upstairs to their room on the fifth floor Jim was eager to see the sights of the city Through the window of the bedroom, he could see beautiful pictures of Ho Chi Minh City It was marvellous to see the city sparkling in colorful lights at night Jim visited many places of interest such as Nha Rong Harbor, Dam Sen Park, Suoi Tien and Sai Gon Water Park Ho Chi Minh City is famous for shopping malls Jim bought a lot of souvenirs for his friends at Sai Gon Tourist Trade Center The next evening the family walked along the streets, then came into a well-known vegetarian restaurant to enjoy delicious food It was really wonderful *** Questions: 1-Who did Jim go to Ho Chi Minh City with? …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-Which places did he visit? ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-What did he buy at Sai Gon Tourist Trade Center? ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-Have you ever been to Ho Chi Minh City? …………………………………………………………………………………………………… V.Rewrite the following sentences, beginning and shown: (3P) 1.Shall I close the windows? =>Do you mind if ……………………………………………………… 2.Could you translate this sentence into Vietnamese? =>Would you mind …………………………………………………… 3.I will repair your bicycle tomorrow =>Your bicycle …………………………………………………………… 4.The girl is my classmate She is talking with Miss Lan (dùng dạng phân từ (V-ing) để viết lại câu ) =>The girl ……………………………………………………………………… 5.I started painting the house two hours ago =>I ………………………………………………………………………… 6.The car was made in Japan The car was very expensive.(quá khứ phân từ (PP) để viết lại các câu ) => …………………………………………………………………… Number I.Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others.(1p) a learned b played c cooked d ruled a mind b window c find d tidy a happened b helped c burned d bored a fields b plants c trees d newspapers II.Choose the best answer and circle the best letter A, B, C or D(2p) In order _ good marks in this test, you must revise your lesson carefully A getting B gets C get D to get This house last week by Mr Smith A was painted B was paint C was paints D painting It’s to find a modern hotel in our disdict A difficulty B more difficult C difficult D most difficult - to America yet ? A Have you ever been B Were you been C Were you D Are you Do you mind if I here? A sitting B sat C to sit D sit Would you mind for a few minutes? A to wait B wait C waiting D waited The red car by the doctor is my neighbor A buy B to buy C buying D bought It’s nice your family A to meeting B to meet C met D meet III Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms: (2p) It is very interesting ( read ) _ newspaper through the Internet They (build) _this house since last monh Would you mind ( play ) the piano ? We learn harder so as ( get ) _ good grades IV-Read the following passage carefully, then answer the questions:(2p) It was the first time Jim went to Ho Chi Minh City with his parents When the plane landed at Tan Son Nhat Airport, the day was fine There was a bright sun, the sky was cloudless and blue It is said that Ho Chi Minh City is the city of sunshine The family took a taxi to the Rex Hotel, a very big hotel in the center After checking in, they went upstairs to their room on the fifth floor Jim was eager to see the sights of the city Through the window of the bedroom, he could see beautiful pictures of Ho Chi Minh City It was marvellous to see the city sparkling in colorful lights at night Jim visited many places of interest such as Nha Rong Harbor, Dam Sen Park, Suoi Tien and Sai Gon Water Park Ho Chi Minh City is famous for shopping malls Jim bought a lot of souvenirs for his friends at Sai Gon Tourist Trade Center The next evening the family walked along the streets, then came into a well-known vegetarian restaurant to enjoy delicious food It was really wonderful *** Questions: 1-Did Jim go to Ho Chi Minh City with his parents? …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2-What did he buy at Sai Gon Tourist Trade Center? ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3-Which places did he visit? ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4-Have you ever been to Ho Chi Minh City? …………………………………………………………………………………………………… V.Rewrite the following sentences, beginning and shown: (3P) 1.The girl is my classmate She is talking with Miss Lan (dùng dạng phân từ (V-ing) để viết lại câu ) =>The girl ……………………………………………………………………… 2.I started painting the house two hours ago =>I ………………………………………………………………………… 3.The car was made in Japan The car was very expensive.(quá khứ phân từ (PP) để viết lại các câu ) => …………………………………………………………………… 4.Shall I close the windows? =>Do you mind if ……………………………………………………… 5.Could you translate this sentence into Vietnamese? =>Would you mind …………………………………………………… 6.I will repair your bicycle tomorrow =>Your bicycle …………………………………………………………… Teaching Date : 05/3/2013 Period 74 TEST REMARK I Objectives By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to remember the old structures and find out their mistakes in the test to corrects II Language contents -Grammar:in order to;so as to;modal will to make requests,offers and promises;passive fom;adjectives followed by an infinitive/a noun clause;ed and ing participles;requests with – would/do you mind +V-ing and would/do you mind if I… III Techniques: Asking and answering, pair work, chatting IV Teaching aids: textbook, 45 minutes test V Procedures T and Ss’ activities Warm-up T: asks Ss to comment the 45 minutes by themselves Ss: comment New lesson a Presentation T: asks Ss to retell grammar structures Ss: answer T: comments and gives the corrects answer Ss: take note and check their tests b Practice T: asks Ss to base on the structures correcting the test Ss: work in pairs part1 Ss: comment - T: corrects Ss: take note 1S: writes on the board part2 Ss: comment T: corrects their mistakes Ss: take note Ss: ask and answer in pairs part3 Ss: comment 1S: writes on the board T: gives the corrects answers Ss: take note Ss: discuss in pairs part4 1S: writes the complete sentence on the board Ss: comment T: gives the corrects answer Ss: take note Contents in order to;so as to+V-inf 2.modal will to make requests,offers and promises; -Would/will/can/could you+V-inf… ? -I will …………….I promise Active S V O Passive S + be + PII by O 4.Adjectives followed by an infinitive S + be + adjective + to inf……… 5.Adjectives followed by a noun clause S + be+ adjective+ that clause 6.ed and ing participles Form: S + V-ing/S + pp 7.would/do you mind +V-ing … ? 8.Do you mind if I +V-inf… 9.Would you mind if I +V-ed/c2… * KEYS I / (1,0marks) No 1: 1.b 2.b 3.c 4.b No 2: 1.c 2.b 3.b 4.b II / 2.0(marks) No 1: 1.C D B D 5.A 6.C 7.A 8.D No 2: D 2.A 3.C 4.A 5.D 6.C 7.D 8.B III / 2,5 (marks) No 1: 1.playing to get to read 4.have built No 2: 1.to read 2.have built 3.playing 4.to get IV (marks) No 1: 1.Jim went to Ho Chi Minh City with his parents 2.Jim visited many places of interest such as Nha Rong Harbor, Dam Sen Park, Suoi Tien and Sai Gon Water Park Ss: discuss in pairs part to write the sentences Ss: comment T: gives the corrects answer Ss: take note 3.Jim bought a lot of souvenirs for his friends at Sai Gon Tourist Trade Center 4.Yes,I have./No, I haven’t No 2: 1.Yes.he did 2.Jim bought a lot of souvenirs for his friends at Sai Gon Tourist Trade Center 3.Jim visited many places of interest such as Nha Rong Harbor, Dam Sen Park, Suoi Tien and Sai Gon Water Park 4.Yes,I have./No, I haven’t Consolidation T: asks some questions ( ask Ss close their books and the test ) Ss: answer T: reviews the main points and asks Ss to learn the lesson carefully for the next test Ss: listen and remember Homework T: asks Ss to: Ss: listen and take note -prepare new lesson V (3marks) No 1: 1.Do you mind if close the windows? 2.Would you mind translating this sentence into Vietnamese? Your bicycle will be repaired tomorrow 4.She talking with Miss Lan is my classmate 5.I have painted the house for two hours 6.The car made in Japan was very expensive No 2: 1.She talking with Miss Lan is my classmate 2.I have painted the house for two hours 3.The car made in Japan was very expensive 4.Do you mind if close the windows? 5.Would you mind translating this sentence into Vietnamese? Your bicycle will be repaired tomorrow - Learn by heart the structures again Teaching Date : 08/3/2013 Period 75 Unit 12 A Vacation abroad Lesson : Getting started+ Listen and read A / Objectives: I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to aware of how to make accept and decline invitations II Language contents: Vocabulary: Voc about traveling Grammar: Progressive tenses with always III Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan , Pictures , chart ( true / false ) B/ Procedure: I Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to Ex L.f - T corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities * Warm up : + Guessing game ( Getting started ) - Show the pictures to Ss , one by one , and ask Ss to guess what country it is - Feedback : a) The USA b) Australia c) Thailand d) Statue e) Canada f ) Japan Students,activities Individual Ss to guess what country it is + Chatting : T :Where you want to visit among these countries? Ss: …………………… T : Why ? Ss : …………………… *Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words + Pre – teach Vocabulary : - to include : bao gåm - to come over : to come to Someone,s house to visit for a short time - to pick so up : to come and get so in your car to drive him / her to a place - abroad (adv ) = in a foreign country -> to be / go / travel / live abroad * Checking Vocabulary : Rub out and remember + True / False Prediction - Set the scene “ Mrs Quyen is going to the USA for a vacation She is ringing her friend , Mrs Smith , to tell her about the trip “ - Put the chart on the board and ask Ss to read the statements a Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from the airport in San Francisco b Mrs Smith invite Mrs Quyen and her husband to stay with her while they are in town c Mrs Quyen does not accept Mrs smith,s invitation because she wants to stay with a Vietnamese friend of hers d Mrs Quyen and her husband will be in the USA for days e Mrs Quyen and her husband will come over to Mrs Smith,s place for dinner one night f Mr Thanh ; Mrs Quyen,s husband , goes abroad for a business meeting - Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements are true or false - Call on some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board * While – reading + Checking predictions : - Have Ss open their books , listen to the tape while reading the dialogue - Call on some Ss to correct the false statements False -> Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from Ha Noi - Copy down new lesson Teacher – Ss Whole class Teacher - Ss to work in pairs to decide if the statements are true or false - Some Ss to read their predictions and write them on the board Pair work Teacher – Ss Individual True False -> … because her accommodation is included in her tickets price True False -> Only Mrs Quyen will come over to Mrs Smith ,s True + Grid : Complete Mrs Quyen ,s schedule - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and work in pairs to complete the grid with the information taken from the dialogue - Call on some Ss to go to the board to write the information in the grid on the board Date Mon 25 Tue 26 Wed 27 Thu 28 Schedule coming Going Having Leaving to San out dinner San Francisco with the Francisco Smiths - Have Ss copy + Comprehension Questions - Ask Ss to look at their books and answer the questions - Let Ss compare their answers with their partner - Call on some Ss to answer - Give feedback and correct Answer key : a) No , they won,t Because they are coming on a tour , and their accommodation is included in the ticket price , so they will stay at the hotel b) No , he won,t Because he will have a business meeting in the evening that day c) Mrs Smith will pick her up at her hotel - Get Ss to copy */ Post – reading :  Grammar Awareness - Tell Ss to read the dialogue again and pick out the statements indicating the following situations Making an invitation Accepting an invitation Declining an invitation Making a complaint - Call on Ss to give their answers and have Ss copy Would you like to come and stay with us … ? you must come over for dinner one night Ye , we ,d love to but we will only be in town for three nights Whole class Pair work - Ss to read the dialogue again and work in pairs to complete the grid with the information taken from the dialogue - Some Ss to go to the board to write the - Ss to look at their books and answer the questions - Individual - Ss compare their answers with their partner - Pair work - Ss to read the dialogue again and pick out the statements indicating the following situations Whole class Pair work Ss to give their answers and have Ss copy - Retell the main points of this lesson - Copy down homeworks - Work Individual That is very kind of you but we are coming on a tour Oh dear He is always working * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson * Homework : Learn by heart new words and structures to give some more examples Do the exercises in the workbook Prepare the next lesson Teaching Date : 09/3/2013 Period 76 UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson : SPEAK I/ Objectives: After this period, students are able : know the way to talk about planning a tour and get acquainted with word relating to the topic II/ Knowledge 1.Language knowledge - Vocabulary : : sightseeing(n); rate(n); per(n); gym(n); double(n) - Grammar : The present simple to talk about the schedule 2.Skills : speaking and writing Techniques :pairwork , groupwork 3.Teaching method : Communicative approach 4.Visual aids : textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard III/ Steps of teaching 1.Greetings 2.Checking attendance IV.Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Warm up: - T asks Ss play “jumbled words” about the name if cities in - take part in the game America - write on the board + Ewn rkyo + cgohaic + wonshaingt + Sol ngaegel a Pre – speaking: - listen - T introduces some ways to exercise - look at their books - T asks Ss to look at the brochures and flight information and listen - listen and repeat, - T introduces some new words then copy down + via + rate per night + single/ double + facilities + gym + business center b While - speaking: - T guides Ss to complete your itinerary complete the -How many flights a week? itinerary - listen and answer -Can you take from Los Angeles to Boston? -Which flight you take everyday of the week? -Which of hotel is cheaper? -How much is a double room in Revere Hotel? -How about Atlantic Hotel? -Where can you visit? - T gives a model and hangs on the board  Where shall we stay? - practice in pair -> The Revere Hotel is very expensive but it has a gym  Where should we visit? -> I think we should visit Harvard Medical school and Art Gallery  What time should we leave Los Angeles? -> There is a daily flight at ten am Would that be O.K? - T calls Ss to practice the model - T asks Ss to work in pairs - T calls some pairs to check - T gives comment * Answers: A: What time should we leave Los Angeles? B: We should leave at 11 am on Monday A: What time shall we arrive Boston? B: We shall arrive at pm A: Where shall we stay? B: We shall stay at the Atlantic hotel A: What shall we see there? B: We shall see Boston University and art galaries A: What time shall we leave Boston? B: We shall leave at 10 am on Thursday c Post - speaking: - T asks Ss to practice with a situation Make a plan for their summer holiday by filling the information in their itinerary -Departure: (Hue ) - Arrive: ( Ho Chi Minh city) - Accommodation: ( hotel ) - T calls some Ss to check and gives marks 5.Homework: Rewrite the answers; learn by heart the new words Teaching Date : 12/3/2013 Period 77 UNIT 12 : A VACATION ABROAD Lesson : Listen I The aim a Knowledges - practice in pair - free practice Listen carefully and check Correct by themselves Observe and listen carefully - practice in pair + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen to the weather reports and fill in the blanks in the table with the information they hear - Standard: Listen and fill in the table - Higher: answer some questions about the weather reports + Vocabulary: temperature(n); centigrade(n) =degree(n); windy(a); humid(a) = wet(a); snowy(a); cloudy(a); minus (n); centigrade(n); zero(n) + Structures: The future simple tense “Be going to” b Skills: + Listening: Listen to the weather reports and and fill in the blanks in the table with the information they hear + Speaking: Ask and answer some questions about the report c Education: Educate ss to learn hard, stay healthy, eat sensibly II Preparations a Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board b Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary III.Procedures: Teacher’s activities *Warm-up Ask ss to play the game “Pelmanism” Students’ activities The whole class play together * Pelmanism sun windy rain wind sunny cloudy Remark the game and present the new lesson *Pre- listening Present the new words * Key  ; 28; 5; 7 Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus Repeat the new words in chorus New words temperature(n) centigrade(n) =degree(n) windy(a) humid(a) = wet(a) snowy(a) cloudy(a) minus (n) centigrade(n) zero(n) cloud rainy Ask ss to read and correct the mistake Ask ss to retell the structures of future simple tense Hang the pisture and present the situation: You are going to listen to the weather reports for the international traveler Present the structure to talk about the weather forecast Guide ss to read the temperature Eg: 00C: zero degree - 50C: minus five degrees 320C: thirty two degrees * While- listening Play the tape (3times) Ask ss to give out their answers on the board Ask others to remark and correct Remark and give out the answers * Post- listening Ask ss to ask and answer What will the weather be like in Sydney/ / Tokyo/ London/ Paris? Ask ss to practice Ask others to remark and correct Remark and give out the answers Listen and correct by themselves Observe listen and answer Observe and listen Structures Eg: - Tokyo will be dry and windy Pairwork - London is going to have a humid day - The low will be 20 and the high will be 26 - It will be cloudy with a low of and a high of 15 Listen carefully and check Listen carefully and repeat in chorus Listen carefully Compare with a partner * Answers: City Weather Sydney 2.Tokyo London Bangkok New York Paris dry,windy dry,windy humid, cold warm, dry windy, cloudy cool, dry Pairwork Listen carefully and check Temperature Hig Low h 20 26 15 22 -3 24 32 15 10 16 * Feed-back What is the main content of the lesson? Correct by themselves * Answers: - It will be dry and windy with the low of 20 degrees and the high of 26 degrees Listen and answer * Homework - Learn the new words and the new structures by heart - Write the instruction in the notebook - Prepare for the next lesson : Part “ Read ” Teaching Date : 16/3/2013 Period 78 UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD Lesson : READ I The aims a Knowledges: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the postcards about Mrs Quyen’s vacation in the USA - Standard: Read and fill in the table and answer the questions - Higher: Retell the Mrs Quyen’s itinerary + Vocabulary: lava (n); wharf (n); volcano (n) ; valley (n); wine-growing (n); island (n); carve (v); situate (v) + Structures: past simple tense b Skills : Reading-comprehension skills: fill in the table and answer the questions c Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love the beauty II Preparations a Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards b Students: review modal verbs, past simple and vocabulary of places III.Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Warm up: - T guides Ss to play “hang man” game - take part in the game NEWYORK a Pre – reading: - T asks: you remember Mrs Quyen? What plan did she have? - answer - T introduces the lesson - T asks Ss to look at the pictures and guess which - listen places she visited - look at pictures and guess - give the answer - T calls some Ss to give the answer - listen and repeat, then - T introduces some new words and their meaning copy down + lava + volcano + pour out + Fisherman’s wharf + Napa valley + carve + “The windy city” + on the shore of + State of Liberty + be situated - read the words + the Empire State Building - T calls some Ss to read the words b While - reading: Write what Mrs Quyen did and saw … - read the postcards - T guides Ss to the exercise - exercise - T asks Ss to read the post cards carefully - compare - T asks Ss to the exercise - give the answer - T asks Ss to correct the answers with their friends - T calls some Ss to give the answer - T comments Answer key: a Hawaii -> went swimming, visited Kilauea Volcano b New York -> went shopping and bought lots of souvenirs c Chicago -> saw Lake Michigan d Mount Rushmore -> saw the heads of American Presidents carved into the rocks - read then work in pair e San Francisco -> visited Fisherman’s Wharf, the - practice in pairs Napa Valley wine growing area and the Alcatraz prison Answer the questions - T asks Ss to read the postcards again to answer the questions - T calls some pairs to give the answer - T comments and gives the correction Answer key: a She went there by plane b She saw the famous prison on the island of Alcatraz - read aloud c On Mount Rushmore ,there are the heads of American Presidents carved into the rocks d It’s “ The Windy City” e She was shopping while her husband was visiting the Statue of Liberty c Post – Reading: - T calls some Ss to read aloud the postcards - answer in pair - take note - T check Ss’ pronunciation - T asks: What you know about the famous places in the U.S.A ? Can you tell some famous places 5.Homework: Reread the postcards; rewrite the exercises; learn by heart the new words Teaching Date : 19/3/2013 Period 79 UNIT 12 : A VACATION ABROAD Lesson : Write I The aim a Knowledges + The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a postcard to a friend about their trip using word cues and the model postcard - Standard: write the postcard using word cues and the the model postcard - Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the postcard + Vocabulary: wonderful (a); complain(v); suitcase(n); hospitable(a); relative(n) + Structures: Structure of writing a postcard the position Past simle tense Present perfect tense “ to buy something for someone” b Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues and model postcard - Speaking skills: ask and answer about the postcard c Education: Educate ss to learn hard and be friendly II Preparations a Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards b Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper III.Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Warm up: - T guides Ss to play “Brainstorming” Activities on holiday: sight seeing, ……… - take part in the game - list all things to on holiday a pre – writing: - T asks: Have you ever sent a postcard to your friend or - answer relative? What you write on a postcard? - listen - T introduces the lesson - the exercise - T asks Ss to the first exercise Complete the postcard Mrs Quyen sent from the USA - give the answer - T calls some Ss to read the post card aloud then write the answer on the board - T comments and gives the corrections (1) in, (2) people, (3) weather , (4) visited , (5) her, (6) - listen and notice nice /lovely, (7) bought , (8) for, (9) heaviness, (10) soon - T reminds Ss how to write a postcard b While writing: Imagine you are a tourist on vacation in a certain place/trip in Vietnam Write a postcard to a friend …………………… - T explains way to write a postcard by asking Ss to pay attention to the information in exercise - T asks Ss to write a postcard - T calls some Ss to read their postcard - T comments c Post – Writing: - T reminds Ss way to write a postcard - listen and notice - write the postcard - read their postcard - listen and notice - take note Answer: well – good friendship – friendly wind – windy visit – visited his – her spend – spent to play – playing bottle – bottles are – is 10 buying – to buy 5.Homework: Write the postcard again Correct errors in the postcard Dear Nam, We’re having a well time on CatBa Island The people are very friendship and helpful The weather has been sunny and wind In CatBa town, I visit my aunt, Mrs Lien and his children I spend the whole morning to play with them I bought lot of souvenirs and two bottle fish sauce Shopping here are wonderful There are a lots things to buying See you soon Teaching Date : 22/3/2013 Unit 12 :a vacation AbRoad Period 80 Lesson 6: language focus A/ The aims: I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to Practice in using Past progressive with While,When and progressive tenses with “always” to complain Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and exercises of unit 12 - Develop Ss’ four skills II Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: -Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue - Two others to retell the main structure grammar - Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students,activities * Warm up: Whole class - T prepares some cards with verbs of actions - One of Ss from each team goes to the front ,picks Team work up one card and mimes Ss of the other team guess what the mime represents and say what s/he was doing at 10,00 last Sunday Model sentences Ba was taking a shower at o'clock last night They were talking to each other at that time * Form: S + Was/ were + V-ing… Use: To indicate an action that was in progress at a point of time in the past * Picture Drill: Hoa/have dinner Bao/ read a comic Nga/ write a letter Na/ walk with her dog 5.Lan and her gradma/ talk to each other Teacher – Ss - Copy down new lesson - Work individually - Look at the picture and exercises - Work in pairs - Some Ss to go to the board to exercises Model sentences The Le family was sleeping when the mailman came The phone rang while Nga was eating Form: Main clause + Adv clause * Past progressive when Past simple * Past simple while Past progressive ->Key to LF2: a-C b-F c-E d-B e-D f-A Model sentence : Bao is always forgetting his homework be adv V-ing… * Form: S + to be + adv( always) + V_ing … The present progressive tense with “always” The progressive tenses are used with always to express a habitual action( usually bad habit as a complaint) ** Ss language focus P.120 -> Key : b Mrs Nga is always losing her umbrella c Mr and Mrs Thanh are always missing the bus d Nam is always watching T.V late f Na is always talking on the phone g Liem is always going out - Complete all the exercises in the notebook - Prepare well for the next period * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson * Homeworks: - Redo all exercises - Learn by heart vocab and model sentences of unit 12 - Prepare for next lesson Teaching date:23 / / 2013 - Copy down new Grammar - Individual Individual Pair work Ss to work in pairs and give their answers some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange Teacher –Ss Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information with the words in the dictation list Pair work Ss to open their books and read the multiple choice questions Individual Some Ss Retell the main points of this lesson Copy down homeworks Unit 13 : festivals Period 81 Lesson : getting started + listen and read A / The aims I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about the rice cooking festival and to understand the rice cooking festival in VN Presenting vocab I Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to Ex L.f - T corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities *Getting started : Chatting 1.Tom likes swimming and sunbathing Where should he go ? Why ? David is interested in ancient cities  ? 3.Huckleberry likes mountain-climbing  ? Oliver is keen on pottery  ? Robinson is fond of crowed places  ? *Vocabulary - fetch (v) ®i lÊy, mang vÒ - yell (v) hÐt to cæ vò - urge (v) thóc giôc - rub (v) xo¸ - participate (v) tham gia - award (v) tÆng thëng - teamate (n) đồng đội - competition (n) cuéc tranh tµi - judge (n) Gi¸m kh¶o * What and where * Listen and read : P.121 Pre- questions 1.How many competitions in the rice-cooking festival? Do all team members go to the river to fetch water? Rice-cooking festival Water fetching To fetch water * Matching : Fire making To make fire Rice-cooking To cook rice Ss’ activitives Group work of 4/5 Ss -Some groups to give their answers and correct - Copy down new lesson - Repeat in chorus T – Ss Whole class Team work - Ss to go to the board and write their words Individual work T – Ss Students listen to the dialoge then answer the questions Groupwork of 4/5 Ss T – Ss Pair work - Ss to write a story using the information from the dialogue Individual work Mét mÈu tre The grand prize trÊu Ss guess the meaning of the words The starting position Vá Gi¶i nhÊt The husk Chủ tịch hội đồng giám khảo of phrases by matching §iÓm xuÊt ph¸t a piece of bamboo The council leader a F b F c T d, F e F f T * Talk about the rice cooking festival: - Three competions Ss work in pairs or in groups to - The way to fetch the water to cook rice talk about the rice cooking - The way to make fire festival - The rice cooking contest - The way to decide the winner of the contest * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson - Retell the main points * Homeworks : Do the exercises 1, in the workbook - Listen and copy down homeworks - Prepare well for the next period Teaching date Period 82 / / 2013 Unit 13 : festivals Lesson : speak A / The aims : I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make up a dialogue and talk about preparations for another festival ( Giving Ss practice in talking about preparations for some festivals in VN) - Develop Ss’ speaking skill II Teaching aids : Textbooks , chalks , poster, lesson plan B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II New lesson : Teacher’s activities *Warm-up Ask ss to play the game “Networks” Divide the class into teams and ask them to play on the stage * Networks school festival festivals village festival Students,activities Whole class Team work Teacher – Ss festivals Remark the game and present the new lesso *Pre- speaking Hang the model dialogue and ask ss to work in pairs to rearrange the sentences to make a correct dialogue between Lan and her Mom to prepare for Tet Structures Eg: - I know what to Individual To V - But I want our house to look nice at the Copy down new lesson V O To V - Listen and repeat in chorus festival - Have you tidied the bedroom? Listen carefully and check Remark correct Ask ss to give out their answers * Answers: A F C  H  D  J  B  G E Ask ss to work in pairs to make a list of things to prepare for the school festival Ask ss to give their ideas Remark and correct Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus Ask ss to read and correct the mistake Individual Present the structures to ask and answer questions to complete the itinerary *While-speaking Pair work Ask ss to work in pairs to make similar dialogues Ss to work in pairs and give their Go around the classroom to help ss practice answers Ask students to practice in pairs before the class Remark and correct the mispronunciation * Post- speaking Now ask ss to look at the suggestions in the table and free-practice about a festival they love or participated Ask ss to pairwork Ask some pairs to practice Ask others to remark and correct Remark and give out the answers  Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson  Homeworks: - Do the exercises in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period Make a dialogue - Work in pairs Some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange Pair work Individual Some Ss Retell the main points of this lesson Copy down homeworks Teaching date Period 83 / / 2013 Unit 13 : festivals Lesson : listen+language focus 1,2 A / The aims : I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen to the dialogue and fill in the blanks with the words they hear - Then listen to the conversation and fill in the gaps - Develop Ss’ listening skill II Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , poster, lesson plan, CD B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up : - Asks 2Ss to go to the board to read the dialogue of unit 13 => T corrects and give them marks III New lesson : Teacher’s activities * Networks game decorate the house Things to prepare for Tet Students,activities Whole class Team work buy food -decorate/ clean/ paint the house/ the room- buy cakes, candies, drink, food, fruits - Cook special meals/ make cakes/ get/ buy new dress - Write/ send postcard to friends, relatives vocabulary -Pomergranate (n) Qu¶ lùu - Peach blossoms (n) Hoa đào - Dried waterlemon seeds (n) H¹t da -Marigolds (n) : Cóc v¹n thä - Sticky rice balls : b¸nh tr«i Spring rolls : B¸nh tÕt , chả giò  Checking up: Rubout and remember *Pre- listening Ask ss to retell the structures of future simple tense Hang the picture and present the situation: You are going to listen to the dialogue between Liz and her parents about the things that they are going to to prepare for Tet Present the structure to talk about the weather Structures Eg: * What sort of flowers? = What kind of flowers? * V follwed by an object and a to + V: need, want / Wh + to V Eg: - I want you to go to the flower market for me, please? - But I need Liz to a few things - She is going to show me how to make spring rolls * While- listening Gap fill Play the tape (3times) Ask ss to give out their answers on the board Ask others to remark and correct Remark and give out the answers Answer key a Mr Robinson/ flower market b traditional c dried watermelon seeds d make * Post- listening Ask ss to complete the notes Ask ss to listen again to complete Ask others to remark and correct Teacher – Ss Individual Copy down new lesson - Listen and repeat in chorus Individual Teacher –Ss Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information with the words in the dictation list - Listen and Gap fill Pair work Ss to open their books and complete the notes Individual Listen and complete Observe, listen and correct Correct by themselves Remark and give out the answers Complete the notes : Things to Go to the flower market to buy Mr Peach blossoms and a bunch of Robinson marigolds Mrs Go to Mrs Nga's to learn how to Robinson make spring rolls Go to the market to buy candies and Liz a packet of dried watermelon seeds * Passive form: Be + Past participle Matching: Tenses Form Present simple a Was/were + V.pp Past simple b Have/has been + Future simple V.pp Present perfect c Is/are/am + V.pp d will/shall be + V.pp * Gapfill : * LF1: P.128 a were performed b was decorated/ put c is made d will be held e was awarded f was written * LF2: P.128-129 - To jumble : lén xén, lµm lÉn lén jumbled broken broken scattered pulled Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson  Homeworks: - Learn by heart vocabulary - Do the exercises in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period - Look at the books and exercises - Work in pairs - Some Ss to go to the board to exercises - Copy down Grammar - Individual Some Ss Retell the main points of this lesson Copy down homeworks Teaching date: Period 84 / / 2013 Unit 13 : festivals Lesson : read A / The aims : I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the appearing origins of the Christmas specials II Teaching aids : Textbooks , poster , cassette , CD, lesson plan,word square chart pictures , drawing B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up : - Asks Ss to go to the board to retell the main structure grammar of last lesson -T corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Students,activities ** Chatting : When is Christmas held every year ? Whole class (December 24th ) Do you celebrate Christmas ? Team work * Vocabulary - spread (v) (spread -spread) : Lan réng Teacher – Ss - design (v) ThiÕt kÕ - perform (v) performance (n) BiÓu diÔn, buæi biÓu diÔn Individual - The patron saint (n) Th¸nh b¶o hé - a Carol (n) bµi h¸t gi¸ng sinh Copy down new lesson - Jolly (adj) = happy and cheerful (adj) vui tÝnh - Listen and repeat in chorus * Checking up: Matching * Read : P.124-125 * True/ Fasle statements : Christmas is an important festival in every country Individual in the world The custom of decorating a tree first appeared in Pair work Europe Ss to work in pairs and give The leaders of the church were unhappy with their answers Christmas carols when they were first ferformed Sending Christmas cards was an American's idea -> Key : F (not every but many countries in the world) T T F (an Englishman's) * Complete the grid : (Read P.126) Christmas Place of Date specials origin The Christmas Riga early 1500s tree The Christmas England mid 19th card century Christmas no 800 years carol information ago Santa Claus USA 1823 * Comprehension questions: (Read P.126) ->Key : a More than a century ago b He wanted to send Christmas greetings to his friends c 800 years ago d An American professor named Clement Clarke Moore e On the description of Sain Nicholas in frofessor Moore's poem Make a dialogue Work in pairs Some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange - Teacher –Ss Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information with the words in the dictation list - Listen and Gap fill Pair work Ss to open their books and complete the notes Individual * Reporting : Eg: On Christmas people often decorate a tree and they send cards to relatives and friends… * Write it up : * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson * Homeworks : - Learn by heart vocabulary - Let students the exercises in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period Some Ss Retell the main points of this lesson Copy down homeworks Teaching date 02/4/ 2013 Unit 13 : festivals Period 85 Lesson : write A / The aims : I Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to Completing a report about the rice – cooking festival.Writing a report about a festival they joined recently Develop Ss’ Writing skill II Teaching aids : Text book , chalk , boards, posters, lesson plan,pictures drawing,mime , picture, gap fill charts B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization: -Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: - Asks two Ss to answer the qs c-d in the book - Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities * Brainstorm - fetching- water - making- fire - cooking- rice - Six people take part in the rice cooking festiaval - Fire is made in the traditional way… * Gapfill (write 1) rice-cooking one/a water-fetching run water traditional bamboo six separate 10 added * Understanding questions : (The answers to the questions below can help you) What does this report show? Where was it held ? How many competitions were there ? What each team in each contest How was the festival ? Name of the festival Where was it held ? How long did it last ? Activities, competitions ? Students,activities Whole class Team work Teacher – Ss Individual Copy down new lesson - Listen and repeat in chorus Individual Pair work Ss to work in pairs and give their answers -Work in pairs Teacher –Ss How were the ativities organized ? How many people took part in each activity ? What did you think about the festival ? Ss to work in pairs , * Write : Write the similar report on a festival you Pair work joined recently Eg: - Write the report on a festival This report shows how the school festival was held The festival was held in the schoolyard There were two competitions: volleyball and jug of war In the volleyball game, the were six students in each team and each class had a volleybal team The played against each other and the 8C team had most points got the grand prize There were ten students who took part in the jug of war Each class had a team and the 9B team won all the others got the first prize The school festival was wonderful it made all the students love their school and study better  Correction:  Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson  Homeworks : - Learn by heart vocabulary Ss to open their books and complete the notes Individual Then compare with their friends Some Ss Retell the main points of this lesson Copy down homeworks - Let students the exercises in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period Teaching date / 04 /2013 Period 86 Unit 13 : festivals Lesson 6: language focus 3,4 A/ The aims: I.Teaching points : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to Practice in using compound words and reported statements Ss will be able to practice all structure grammar and exercises - Develop Ss’ four skills II Preparation: -Text books, lesson plan, posters B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization: - Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: -Asks Ss to retell the new words and read again the dialogue - Two others to retell the main structure grammar - Teacher corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities * Warm up: * Net work : Preparations for Tet Model sentences: * Compound nouns : A rice cooking Students,activities Whole class Team work festival (article)(noun) (V-ing) (noun) - To form compound adjective: noun + V-ing * LF : P.130 Answer key a A fire-making contest b A bull-fighting festival c A car-making industry d A flower-arranging contest e A rice-exporting country f A clothes-washing machine * Reported speech : Model sentences : He said "I'm a plumber" ->direct speech He said he was a plumber -> reported speech Changes: Tenses: Direct speech Indirect-reported speech present simple past simple will / must / can would / had to / could 2.Pronouns: Depend on the Subject of the main clause Advs of time: This  that / now  then / here  there Individual Pair work Ss to work in pairs and give their answers some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange Teacher –Ss Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information with the words in the dictation list Pair work Ss to open their books and exercises today  that day / tomorrow  the next day Yesterday  the day before / ago  before * LF : P.130 : Transformation drill b He said he could fix the faucets c He said the pipes were broken d He said new pipes were expensive e He said Mrs Thu had to pay him then Individual * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson * Homeworks: - Redo all exercises - Learn by heart vocab and model sentences of unit 12 - Prepare for next lesson Some Ss Retell the main points of this lesson Teaching date: Copy down homeworks / / 2013 Unit14 : wonders of the world Lesson : getting started + listen and read Period 87 A / The aims I Teaching points: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to seek information about a language game to complete a summary I Teaching aids : Textbooks , cassette , chalks , boards, posters , lesson plan B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organizaton: -Greeting and checking attendance II Checking up: - Ask Ss to go to the board to Ex L.f - T corrects and give them marks III New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ss’ activitives *Getting started : Matching a The Pyramid Group work of 4/5 Ss b Sydney Opera House -Some groups to give their answers c Stonehenge and correct * Vocabulary - Clue (n) Manh mèi - Copy down new lesson - Rule (n) luËt ch¬i - Repeat in chorus * Presentation dialogue : (Listen and read – P.131-132) - Asks sts to open their books and * Gapfill : (Listen and read P.132) read the dialogue on page 131, 132 game place clue Vietnam while listening to the tape American Gold right was - Plays the tape ** Sets the scene: - Checks if sts' guesses are right or " Nga , Nhi and Hoa are playing a language game not called guessing game How does this game work? - Have sts to copy statements in the Rearrange the statements in the right order of the right order game" - Puts the statements chart on the board - Asks sts to read the statements and put them in the T – Ss Students listen to the dialoge then right order answer the questions - Calls on some pairs to go to the board and write their answers Groupwork of 4/5 Ss ( - wonder (n): kú quan - gold gate bridge: cÇu cæng vµng T – Ss - clue (n): gîi ý Pair work While- reading: - Ss to write a story using the Sts to open their books and read the dialogue on information from the dialogue page 131, 132 while listening to the tape Individual work * Ordering sentences : How to play the guessing game? Ss guess the meaning of the words B asks questions to find out what it is of phrases by matching A thinks of a famous person or place B wins if he/she can guess the correct answer A gives B a clue B loses if he/she can't guess the correct answer A only can answer "yes" or "no" - Asking sts to read the summary ->Key: - - - - 3- again *Grammar : - Write the words on the board Model sentences: - Asks sts to match the words in I don't know how to play it column A with their explanations in * Form: S + V + question word + to infinitive *Use: Reduced form of an indirect question Ex: I don't know how can I play it how to play it Please tell me where I can go during the visit where to go A B Eg: I don't know how I can play it to play it b Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets c Nga pointed out where to buy sourvenirs d.Nga advised Nhi how to go from My Son to H.An e Nga told Nhi what to there during the visit * Guessing game : Teacher: It is a wonder and it is in Asia St:(guess) Teacher : yes/ no * Consolidation: - Retell the main points in the leson * Homeworks: - Do the exercises 1, in the workbook - Prepare well for the next period column B - Asks some sts to give their answers - Retell the main points - Listen and copy down homeworks Teaching date: Period 88 / / 2013 UNIT 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson : SPEAK I/ Objectives: After this period, students are able to get more information about some wonders of the world by practicing with his or her friends get information in order to correct the mistakes II/ Knowledge 1.Language knowledge 1.1 Vocabulary : 1.2 Grammar : 1.3 Pronunciation 2.Skills : Listening , speaking, reading and writing Techniques :pairwork , groupwork 3.Teaching method : Communicative approach 4.Visual aids : textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard III/ Steps of teaching 1.Greetings 2.Checking attendance 3.Reviewing the previous lesson Call some sts to say how to show way and write vocabulary New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Speak: * Warm up: - T asks Ss play “Net works” about famous places all over - take part in the game the world - write on the board Famous places a Pre – speaking: - T introduces the lesson - T guides Ss to exerciser 1 Think of 10 famous places …… - T asks Ss to make question about ten places as example - T asks Ss to work in group to ask and answer b While - speaking: - T calls some Ss to give the answer - T comments and give the suggestions Is Phong Nha cave in the Southern Viet Nam ?- No Is PETRONAS Twin Towers the tallest building in the world ?- Yes - listen and notice - make questions - work in group - give the answer Is the Great Barrrier Reef a World Heritade Site ?- No Is the Great Wall in the China in the southern of the country ?- No Is the Empire State Building USA in California ? No Is Hue Citadel in an ancient town ? No Is Ha Long Bay one of the world Wonders ? Yes Is Eiffel Tower in German ? No Is Big Ben in England ? Yes Talk about your classmates’ answers with your partner - T introduces new structure: Indirect question with If/ whether Ex: T: Is Ha Long Bay in the Northern Viet Nam? -> Yes, it is S: Is Big Ben in Paris? -> No ( Hoa answers ) T: I asked Hoa if Ha Long Bay was in the Northern of Viet Nam And she said Structuers  Form : S + asked + O + If / whether + S + V  Usage : to report the yes/ no question Present simple -> past simple - T asks Ss to report 10 questions which they have just set - T calls some Ss to check - listen and notice - report the questions - one say question, one report it - copy down - T comments - listen I asked Nam if Phong Nha cave was in Southern VN and he said that it wasn’t - listen and talk I asked Hoa if PETRONAS Twin Towers was the tallest building in the world and she said it was - take note I asked Tuan if the Great Barrrier Reefis a World Heritade Site and he said that it wasn’t c Post - speaking: - T asks Ss to copy all the sentences which they practiced with their partner 5.Homework: Learn by heart the new words; reread the dialogue; rewrite the answers Teaching date: Period 89 / / 2013 UNIT 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson : LISTEN + Language focus I/ Objectives: After this period, students are able to get more information about some wonders of the world by practicing with his or her friends get information in order to correct the mistakes II/ Knowledge 1.Language knowledge 1.1 Vocabulary : 1.2 Grammar : 1.3 Pronunciation 2.Skills : Listening , speaking, reading and writing Techniques :pairwork , groupwork 3.Teaching method : Communicative approach 4.Visual aids : textbook , extraboard, pictures , flashcard III/ Steps of teaching 1.Greetings 2.Checking attendance 3.Reviewing the previous lesson Call some sts to say how to show way and write vocabulary New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’ activities *Warm-up( Ask ss to play the game “Hangman” - take part in the game * Hangman : You watch this program to buy something The whole class play together _ Key : advertisement Remark the game and present the new lesson a Pre – listening: - T introduces the lesson and some voc + jungle + crystal- clear water + coral sea + snorkel - T asks Ss to read the advertisement to get the main ideas b While - listening: - T asks Ss to listen to the tape to correct the mistakes - T plays the tape once - T plays the tape (three times) - T asks Ss to compare the answers - T calls some Ss to read the mistakes and give the correction - T plays the tape again and gives the correction Answer keys: far north Queenland the Coconut Palm Hotel the rainforest - listen and repeat, then copy down - read for information - listen - listen for information - listen and the exercise - pair work - give the answer (077) 6924 3927 c Post – Listening: - T reminds Ss the content of lesson - T asks Ss: How many people are there in the dialogue? What are they talking about? *Language focus +to – infi or bare -infi” Present the aim and ask ss to look at the model sentences and present the aim Ask ss to look at the model sentences and guide ss to the exercise Ask ss to on the drafting paper to Ask ss to write on the board Ask ss to correct Remark and give out the answers * Keys: 0) to go 1) to jog 2) go 3) to gather 4) to rain 5) to reach 6) to continue 7) get - listen - listen and talk - take note Observe and listen Do on the drafting paper Listen and correct Listen and copy 5.Homework:Learn by heart the new words; reread the dialogue; rewrite the answers Teaching date: Period 90 / / 2013 UNIT 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson : read A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to get some knowledge about the wonders of the world Read for details about the wonders of the world B / Teaching aids : Chart , posters., cassette , pictures , … C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I / Warm up : Hangman - Have Ss guess the letters one by one - For each wrong guess , draw a line from to Ss lose the game if they guess wrong times Words : Coral , Crystal – clear , Snorkel , Relaxing  C-O-R-A-L II / Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to Ss Pre –teach vocabulary : - to compile ( translation ) - to claim = to say something is true - to honor = to show respect - a god (male ) -> goddess ( female ) - religion (n) -> religious (adj ) - royal (adj ) ( situation ) => Have Ss copy in their notebooks * Checking vocabulary : Slap the board Whole class Teacher Teacher – Ss Compile Royal Whole class Honor Claim God Religious True - False predictions : - Put the chart on the board Statements Guess Read An Egyptian man compiled a list of what F he thought were the seven wonders of the world The only surviving wonder is the Pyramid T of Cheeps in Egypt Today , we can still see the Hanging F Gardens of Babylon in present – day Irag Angkor Wat was originally built to honor T a Hindu God The Great wall of china first was not in T the list of the seven wonders of the world In the early 15th century , the Khoner King F chose Angkor Wat as the new capital - Ask Ss to work in groups to decide if the statements are true or false - Collect and write their predictions on the board III / While - reading : - Turn on the tape times and ask Ss to read the text / 134 to check their predictions - Call on some Ss to correct the false statements False : A Greek man named Antipater did it False : The only surviving wonder is the pyramid of Cheops in Egypt False : In the early 15 th century , the Kh, mer King chose Phnom Penh as the new capital * Multiple Choice : Complete the sentences - Ask Ss to choose the best answers to complete the sentences - Put the answers chart on the board - Read the statements aloud and make hand gestures to show the missing words - Have Ss choose A , B , C or D - Correct and get Ss write the right answers in their notebooks a) C - the Pyramid of Cheops b) A - Hindus c) D - was part of a royal Khmer city a long time ago d) B - chose Phnom Penh as the new capital IV / Post- reading : Grid - Draw the grid on the board and have Ss copy it - Ask Ss to read the text again and fill in the grid with the information taken from the text Wonders of the world Country Hanging gardens of Irag Babylon ……… ……… ……… ……… …… ……… - Call on some Ss to give their answers - Correct the mistakes , and write the correct answers in their notebooks V / Homework : Learn by heart new words and write two lines for each one Do the exercises in the workbook Prepare the next lesson Pair work Teacher Teacher Individual - Individual Whole class Pair work Whole class Individual Teacher – Ss Individual Teaching date: Period 91 / / 2013 UNIT 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson : write A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a letter to a friend about a place they have visited B / Teaching aids : Drawing , pictures … C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I / Warm up : Guessing games " Wonders of the world " - Have Ss think of one of the wonders of the world and write it on a piece of paper Whole class - Call on a student to the front of the class with his / her paper - Get the rest of the class ask him / her yes-no questions to guess the wonder - The student having the right guess will take the place of the last student II / Pre- writing : Introduce the topic of writing and some new Teacher words to students Pre – teach vocabulary : - a ranger = a person who takes care of a park Teacher – Ss - Edge = mÐp - a canyon ( translation ) - Breathtaking (adj ) = very exciting , impressive - Temperate (adj) ( translation ) - Stone Age :Thời kì đồ đá => Have Ss copy Whole class * Checking vocabulary : What and where Insertion : Complete the letter - Ask Ss to read the letter Tim sent to Hoa about his trip to the grand Canyon / 135 - Tell Ss to complete the letter by inserting the letters of the missing sentences ( A , B , C and D ) - Call on some Ss to read their completed letters in front of class - Give feedback and correct C B D A III / While - writing : - Set the scene “ Imagine you have visited a place recently write a letter to a friend of yours and tell him / her about this place “ - Hang the board with the outline - Ask Ss to write the letter in their notebooks - Monitor and help Ss if necessary - Call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class - Collect some Ss, writings to correct common mistakes - Give feedback and correct Dear Mai , I am writing this letter to you that you have just returned from a trip to Ha long Bay with my family The sight was extremely magnificient It took us five or six hours by car to get there from Hanoi We spent more than a week there The weather was perfect It was sunny , cool and windy Wee enjoyed walking along the seaside at night very much It was really interesting when we knew about the legenda of Ha Long bay We really want to come back there when we have time next year How are you getting with your study at home ? Where are you going for your holiday ? Let me know Your friend , Lan - Have some Ss read the complete letter aloud IV / Post - writing : Interview - Ask Ss to use the outline on the board and the information in their letters to make an interview + Call on a student to stand up to answer the questions : Where have you just visited ? How far is it ? How did you get there ? What is it like ? / Is it beautiful ? How about the weather ? How did you feel ? - Have Ss play in turn the role of an interviewer and Teacher – Ss Individual Teacher Individual Individual Teacher – Ss Pair work interviewee - Monitor and correct - Call on some pairs to demonstrate their interview V / Homework : Learn by heart new words and write two lines for each one Rewrite the letter in their notebooks Do the exercises in their workbooks Prepare the next lesson Teaching date: Period 92 Individual Remember and complete / / 2013 UNIT 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson : Language focus 2,3 A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson - Indirect questions with “if” and “whether” - Question-words before to-infinitives B / Teaching aids : lesson plan, English 8-book, extra boards C / Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities *Warm-up(5’) Ask ss to play the game “Matching” V ask tell complete think may design VP1 asked told completed thought might designed * Matching: Three groups play on the stage VP2 asked told completed thought Observe and listen Listen and tell designed Pairwork Remark the game and present the new lesson *Indirect questions” -( Exercise 2) Ask ss to look at the model sentences in part and present the aim of exercise 2: report the questions that Nga and Nhi talked about My Son Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the sentences Ask some pairs to practice Remark and correct Remark and correct * Exercise * Keys: b) Nhi asked Nga if it was far from Ha Noi c) Nhi asked Nga if My Son was in Quang Nam province d ) Nhi asked Nga if many people lived at My Son e ) Nhi asked Nga if many tourists visited my Son every year f ) Nhi asked Nga if she wanted to visit My Son one day Observe and listen Do on the drafting paper Listen and correct *Question words before to - infinitives” -( Exercise 3) Ask ss to look at the model sentences and present the aim Ask ss to look at the model sentences and guide ss to the exercise Ask ss to on the drafting paper to Ask ss to write on the board Ask ss to correct Remark and give out the answers * Homework - Do the exercises again in the book - Learn all vocabulary and grammar - Prerpare for the next period: Revision Listen and copy * Exercise * Keys: a) Nga told Nhi how to get there b) Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets c) Nga pointed out Nhi where to buy souvenirs d) Nga advised Nhi how to go from My Son to Hoi An e) Nga told Nhi what to there during the visit Observe and listen Listen and correct Listen and copy Teaching date: / / 2013 Period 93 Revision A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to summarize the basic knowledge they have learnt in the lessons -Ss will be able to Practice in using Passive form : be + past participle and Reported speech , and revising compound words and reported statements B / Teaching aids : Chart , posters., … C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities * Revision : / The Passive Form Column A Column B Tenses Form Present Simple a Was / were + PP Past Simple b Have / has been + PP Future Simple c is / am / are +PP Present Perfect d Will / shall be + PP - Call Ss to give their answers and give feedback - Have them copy / Compound words: ( article + noun + verb- ing + noun )  To form a compound adjective  Noun + Verb-ing Ex: A fire – making contest / Reported speech a Tenses Quoted speech Reported speech - Present simple -> Past simple - Will -> Would - Must -> Had to b Pronouns : ( depending on the subject of the main clause ) c Adverb of place and time This -> That / Now -> then Here - > there / Today -> that day Tomorrow - > the next day / Yesterday ->the day before / Ago -> before / Question words before to - infinitives * Tell / how / go there -> Nga told Nhi how to go there - Check if Ss recognize the model sentences Individual Pairwork Individual Teacher Individual => S + V + Question worh + to – infinitive - Have Ss say the next sentence - Give feedback and correct - Get them to the rest of the exercise orally with the same steps / Verb + to - infinitive a I want to go out at weekends to – infinitive b She enjoys swimming very much Verb-ing c He can speak many language modal bare infinitive verb Pairwork Individual Whole class Teacher Individual  Notes : a Most of the verbs in English are followed by a to -infinitive b Some verbs are used as enjoyed : start , begin , c Modals : can , could , will , might , must => Get Ss to copy * Homework : - Learn by heart all the structures in the lessons and give some examples with them - Redo the exercises in their notebooks - Do the exercise in the workbook - Ready the test Whole class Individual Remember and complete Teaching Date : 16/04 /2013 Period 94 Test( no ) A / The aims : I Teaching points : Students will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt from unit 12 to unit 14 so that they can supplement what they are short of II Teaching aids : Test paper , chalks , boards, T gives contents of the test B/ Steps of the lesson: I Organization: II Checking up: III Contents:- Ask Ss to implement the regulations of the test lesson - Deliver test papers to Ss *- Ma trËn: NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiÓu VËn dông Chủ đề TN TN TL TL TN TL I Phonetic 1,0 II Reading III Language focus IV Writing Tæng sè: 10 4,0 1,0 2,0 2,0 Tæng sè: 2,0 3,0 12 4,0 2,0 Number 2,0 12 4,0 3,0 26 10 I.Choose one word whose underlined part in pronounced different from the others in each question (1.0ms) A listened A great A mind A misses B collected B hate B window B lives C needed C heat C find C learns D wanted D afraid D tidy D needs II.Choose A, B, C or D is the best answer to complete these sentences (2.0 ms) 1.Would you mind _the washing up for me tonight ? A B did C doing 2.Sydney Opera House by the Danish architect, John Utzon A is designed B.was designed 3.Lan said that she go home then A must B have to D to C were designed D designed C had to D has to 4.In the ……festival, a fire was made in the traditional way A cooking-rice B rice-cooking C cook-ricing D ricing-cook 5.I when you phoned me last night A sleep B slept C is sleeping D was sleeping She asked me if I _pop music A like B to like I can see a boy …………….a water buffalo A ride B riding C will like C to ride D liked D rode I have to get up early this morning………go to school on time A so that to B in order to C so order to D that order to III Put the verbs in the right forms (2.0 ms) Lan told Mai how……………………to the city (get) 2.he (live) in Ha Noi for three months 3.The ruler (make)…………………… of plastic is Lan’s 4.Do you mind ( close)……………….…….the door? IV Read the passage carefully, then answer the questions ( 2ms) Viet Nam’s New Year is celebrated according to the Lunar Calendar It is officially known as Tet Nguyen Dan or Tet It begins between January and February Vietnamese people usually make preparation for the holiday several weeks beforehand They tidy their houses, cook special food … On the New Year’s Eve, people sit up to midnight to see the New Year in, and then they put on new clothes and give one another the greetings of the season Tet lasts about ten days Questions: What is Viet Nam’s New Year known as? When does the Lunar New Year begin? What Vietnamese people usually to prepare for Tet? What people on the New Year’s Eve? V Rewrite these sentences (3.0 ms) 1.Hoa said to me, "I am doing my homework now" => Hoa told me that …………………………… May I turn on the TV? => Do you mind if I ? The boy is Nam He is watching TV ‘Dïng present participle (V-ing)’’ =>………………………………………………………… ‘Do you like coffee?’’ Minh asked Long => Minh asked Long……………………… ………… 5.Mrs Ngan/ lose/ her umbrella (Complete sentence, using the present progresss with Always) => show/ where/ buy souvenirs (Wh-Question + to + V(infinitive)) => Number I.Choose one word whose underlined part in pronounced different from the others in each question (1.0ms) 1.A mind B window C find D tidy A misses B lives C learns D needs 3.A listened B collected C needed D wanted 4.A great B hate C heat D afraid II.Choose A, B, C or D is the best answer to complete these sentences (2.0 ms) 1.I when you phoned me last night A sleep B slept C is sleeping D was sleeping She asked me if I _pop music A like B to like C will like D liked I can see a boy …………….a water buffalo A ride B riding C to ride D rode I have to get up early this morning………go to school on time A so that to B in order to C so order to D that order to 5.Would you mind _the washing up for me tonight ? A B did C doing D to 6.Sydney Opera House by the Danish architect, John Utzon B is designed B.was designed 7.Lan said that she go home then B must B have to C were designed D designed C had to D has to 8.In the ……festival, a fire was made in the traditional way B cooking-rice B rice-cooking C cook-ricing D ricing-cook III Put the verbs in the right forms (2.0 ms) 1.The ruler (make)…………………… of plastic is Lan’s 2.Do you mind ( close)……………….…….the door? Lan told Mai how……………………to the city (get) 4.he (live) in Ha Noi for three months IV Read the passage carefully, then answer the questions ( 2ms) Viet Nam’s New Year is celebrated according to the Lunar Calendar It is officially known as Tet Nguyen Dan or Tet It begins between January and February Vietnamese people usually make preparation for the holiday several weeks beforehand They tidy their houses, cook special food … On the New Year’s Eve, people sit up to midnight to see the New Year in, and then they put on new clothes and give one another the greetings of the season Tet lasts about ten days Questions: 1.When does the Lunar New Year begin? 2.What is Viet Nam’s New Year known as? 3.What people on the New Year’s Eve? 4.What Vietnamese people usually to prepare for Tet? V Rewrite these sentences (3.0 ms) ‘Do you like coffee?’’ Minh asked Long => Minh asked Long……………………… ………… 2.Mrs Ngan/ lose/ her umbrella (Complete sentence, using the present progresss with Always) => show/ where/ buy souvenirs (Wh-Question + to + V(infinitive)) => 4.Hoa said to me, "I am doing my homework now" => Hoa told me that …………………………… May I turn on the TV? => Do you mind if I ? The boy is Nam He is watching TV ‘Dïng present participle (V-ing)’’ =>………………………………………………………… 45 minute Test :No4-A Full name: Class I Mark: Choose one word whose underlined part in pronounced different from the others in each question (1.0ms) A listened B collected C needed D wanted A great B hate C heat D afraid A mind B window C find D tidy A misses B lives C learns D needs II.Choose A, B, C or D is the best answer to complete these sentences (2.0 ms) 1.Would you mind _the washing up for me tonight ? A B did C doing 2.Sydney Opera House by the Danish architect, John Utzon C is designed B.was designed 3.Lan said that she go home then C must B have to D to C were designed D designed C had to D has to 4.In the ……festival, a fire was made in the traditional way C cooking-rice B rice-cooking C cook-ricing D ricing-cook 5.I when you phoned me last night A sleep B slept C is sleeping D was sleeping She asked me if I _pop music A like B to like C will like I can see a boy …………….a water buffalo A ride B riding C to ride I have to get up early this morning………go to school on time A so that to B in order to C so order to III Put the verbs in the right forms (2.0 ms) Lan told Mai how……………………to the city (get) 2.he (live) in Ha Noi for three months 3.The ruler (make)…………………… of plastic is Lan’s 4.Do you mind ( close)……………….…….the door? D liked D rode D that order to IV Read the passage carefully, then answer the questions ( 2ms) Viet Nam’s New Year is celebrated according to the Lunar Calendar It is officially known as Tet Nguyen Dan or Tet It begins between January and February Vietnamese people usually make preparation for the holiday several weeks beforehand They tidy their houses, cook special food … On the New Year’s Eve, people sit up to midnight to see the New Year in, and then they put on new clothes and give one another the greetings of the season Tet lasts about ten days Questions: What is Viet Nam’s New Year known as? When does the Lunar New Year begin? What Vietnamese people usually to prepare for Tet? What people on the New Year’s Eve? V Rewrite these sentences (3.0 ms) 1.Hoa said to me, "I am doing my homework now" => Hoa told me that …………………………… May I turn on the TV? => Do you mind if I ? The boy is Nam He is watching TV ‘Dïng present participle (V-ing)’’ =>………………………………………………………… ‘Do you like coffee?’’ Minh asked Long => Minh asked Long……………………… ………… 5.Mrs Ngan/ lose/ her umbrella (Complete sentence, using the present progresss with Always) => show/ where/ buy souvenirs (Wh-Question + to + V(infinitive)) => 45 minute test :No4-B Full name: Class Mark: I.Choose one word whose underlined part in pronounced different from the others in each question (1.0ms) 1.A mind B window C find D tidy A misses B lives C learns D needs 3.A listened B collected C needed D wanted 4.A great B hate C heat D afraid II.Choose A, B, C or D is the best answer to complete these sentences (2.0 ms) 1.I when you phoned me last night A sleep B slept C is sleeping D was sleeping She asked me if I _pop music A like B to like C will like D liked I can see a boy …………….a water buffalo A ride B riding C to ride D rode I have to get up early this morning………go to school on time A so that to B in order to C so order to D that order to 5.Would you mind _the washing up for me tonight ? A B did C doing D to 6.Sydney Opera House by the Danish architect, John Utzon D is designed B.was designed 7.Lan said that she go home then D must B have to C were designed D designed C had to D has to 8.In the ……festival, a fire was made in the traditional way D cooking-rice B rice-cooking C cook-ricing D ricing-cook III Put the verbs in the right forms (2.0 ms) 1.The ruler (make)…………………… of plastic is Lan’s 2.Do you mind ( close)……………….…….the door? Lan told Mai how……………………to the city (get) 4.he (live) in Ha Noi for three months IV Read the passage carefully, then answer the questions ( 2ms) Viet Nam’s New Year is celebrated according to the Lunar Calendar It is officially known as Tet Nguyen Dan or Tet It begins between January and February Vietnamese people usually make preparation for the holiday several weeks beforehand They tidy their houses, cook special food … On the New Year’s Eve, people sit up to midnight to see the New Year in, and then they put on new clothes and give one another the greetings of the season Tet lasts about ten days Questions: 1.When does the Lunar New Year begin? 2.What is Viet Nam’s New Year known as? 3.What people on the New Year’s Eve? 4.What Vietnamese people usually to prepare for Tet? V Rewrite these sentences (3.0 ms) ‘Do you like coffee?’’ Minh asked Long => Minh asked Long……………………… ………… 2.Mrs Ngan/ lose/ her umbrella (Complete sentence, using the present progresss with Always) => show/ where/ buy souvenirs (Wh-Question + to + V(infinitive)) => 4.Hoa said to me, "I am doing my homework now" => Hoa told me that …………………………… May I turn on the TV? => Do you mind if I ? The boy is Nam He is watching TV ‘Dïng present participle (V-ing)’’ =>………………………………………………………… Teaching Date : 20/04 /2013 Period 96 Unit 15 : Computers Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to get Ss to differentiate facts from opinions through reading , and express their opinions about a problem B / Teaching aids : Posters , cassette , realia , chart , pictures C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I / Warm up : Getting started ( Brainstorming ) - Write the topic on the board - Computer can help us : + Save time Individual - Ask Ss to think of the topic and express their opinions - Collect Ss , opinions and write them on the board => Lead in the new lesson II / Pre-reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students Teacher Preteach vocabulary : - a printer ( picture ) - a manual = a book coming with a machine teklls you Teacher – Ss how to use / operate the machine - to connect ( hand guesture ) - under guarantee : The machine you buy at a shop will be under guarantee from to 12 months - a plug (realia) - Socket (realia)  Have Ss copy  Checking vocabualry : Bingo True or false prediction Whole class - Set the scene “ Nam and his father , Mr Nhat are talking about the problem of the computer , they have bought What happens to the computer? “ Teacher - Put the chart on the board and have Ss guess which statements are true and which are false Statements Guess Read Pairwork The printer is not working T Nam has laready turned the computer T on Nam knows how to connect a printer F but he has not connected it properly The manual helped them to find out the F problem Mr Nhat bought the computer in HCM T City and it is still under guarantee Mr Nhat thinks the company would F not anything with his computer because it is too far from his place - Call on some pairs to give their answers and write their guesses on the board III / While - reading : Check Ss, predictions : - Ask Ss to open their books , read the dialogue / 138 and listen to the tape - Have ss work in pairs again to check if their guesses are right or wrong - Feedback and correct the false ones : F -> Nam know how to connect s printer and he has connected it properly F -> Mr Nhat thinks it is not very helpful F -> Mr Nhat thinks the company should something with it - Have Ss copy the correct sentences Reading comprehension : - Explain the words : “ Fact and Opinion “ + Fact : a thing that is known to be true , especially when it can be proved + Opinion : Your feelings or thoughts about someone or something , raher than a fact - Have ss read the statements and check the suitable boxes - Call on some Ss to give their answers * Answer key : a) Fact b) Opinion c) Opinion d) Fact e) Fact f) Opinion - Get Ss to copy IV / Post-reading : - Ask Ss to use reported speech to rewrite the dialogue - Divide the class into groups and assign each group to report about 3-4 sentences - Have them write their report on a poster and put it on the board for public check V / Home work : Learn by hear new words and write two line for each word Do the ex in the workbook and prepare the next lesson Teaching Date : /0 /2013 Period 97 Teacher – Ss Whole class Pairwork Teacher – Ss Whole class Teacher Individual Whole class Group work of 10 / 15 Ss Individual Unit 15 : Computers Lesson 2: Speak A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use some common useful expressions to express agreement and disagrement Listen for details B / Teaching aids : Posters , chart , pictures C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities I / Warm up : Guessing game : “ Do you think that ? “ - Ask Ss each to think one of the ways comptuers are helpful and write it on a pice of paper - Call on a stude4nt to the front of the class - Get the rest of the class ask him/ her “ Do you think that computer are ? - The student can only answer with yes or no - Tell Ss the one to have the right guess will get one good mark and go on answering the classmates / questions II / Pre-speaking: Introduce the topic of the speaking and structures to students Brainstorm : - Write the topic on the board : Useful expressions to express agreements and disagreements - Put the table on the board and elicit students, answers then write them on the table Opinion Agreement Degree of Disagreement Agreement I like So I I agree , I disagree , I don t like I agree but I can not agree I think You are right Yes , but on with you I feel Neither I the other No , I think I not hand believe - Explain the phrase “ on the other hand “ to Ss - Get Ss to copy the table Matching : - Put the pictures / 139 on the right of the board and the word cues on the left ( not in order ) - Have Ss match the words with the pictures Reading comic books d Playing in the rain a Driving a car b Foreign food c Students’ activities Individual Teacher Teacher – Ss Whole class Individual - Call on some Ss to go to the board to draw the matching lines => Answer key : b c a d III / While - speaking : - Erase the words but leave the pictures * Oral Drill - Get a student to demonstrate the model (a) T : I think driving a car is easy Ss : I disagree I think it is difficult to drive a car or So I - Ask Ss to use the adjectives in the box on page 140 to express their opinions after going through the meaning of some new words entertaining time - consuming challenging * Suggestions : - easy once we get used to it - Challenging difficult to get used to driving in traffic - Dangerous b Comic - boring Reading comic books - interesting / fun - time – consuming c Foreign food - delicious Humbergers , pizza , fun to eat French fries - unhealthy d Playing in the rain - fun - interesting - entertaining - Have Ss use the pictures on the board to practice speaking with their partners - Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class - Give feedback and correct IV / Post-speaking : Mapped dialogue - Present the dialogue and have Ss repeat , sentence by sentence - Call on one student to demonstrate the dialogue + Open pair + Closed pairs : Ss make similar dialogues refering the cues / 140 to replace the information V /Homework : Write complete dialogues in your notebooks Do the exercises in the owrkbook Prepare the next lesson Teacher – Ss Pair work a Driving a car Learning to drive a car Teacher Teacher – Ss Pair work Teacher Individual Teaching Date : Period 98 /04 /2013 Lesson Listen ( cña Unit 16 trang 150) A/ Aims and objectives : Listening about paper making By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand content of listening B / Teaching aids : tables C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I/ Warm up : Bingo - Get Ss to brainstorm a list of 10 words and write them on the Individual board foreman process , manufacture , remove , crush , liquefy , grind , pour , mold , conveyor belt - Ask ss to choose any words and copy them into their paper - Call out the words until someone has ticked all of his / her words and shouts “ Bingo “ II / Pre-listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and some Teacher new words to students Pre-teach vocabulary : - Procedure (n) ( Translation ) - Pulp (nu) -> What is used to make paper ? - Vat (n) ( picture / drawing ) - to drain = to make something empty or dry by removing all the liquid from it ) - Roller (n) ( picture ) - Roll (n) ( realia ) => Have Ss copy III / While -listening : Gap fill ( Listen ) - Inform the topic : Paper – making process - Have Ss read the sentences - Play the tape or times and ask ss to fill in the gaps with the words they catch - Ask ss to compare their answers with their partners - Call on Ss to give their answers Answer Key : simple same two hundred left rollers - Call on some Ss to read the complete sentences in front of class IV/ Post - reading : Ordering Prediction ( Listen ) - Ask ss to read the sentences (a-> g ) carefully and guess the order - Ask Ss to work in groups to predictions - Collect their predictions and write their predictions on the board - Play the tape again and ask Ss to listen - Call on Ss to give their correction - Give feedback and correct : Answer key : c Paper pulp was placed in the vat d Paper pulp was mixed with water a The water was drained e The pulp fibers were poured out g The pulp was conveyed under the rollers f The fibers were smoothed and pressed dry b The paper was put on a roll => Call on some Ss to read the complete sentences aloud - Get them to copy their notebooks V/ Homework : Learn by heart new words and write two lines for each one Use the information in the table to write 12 sentences in the notebooks Prepare the next lesson Teacher –Ss Individual Teacher – ss Whole class Teacher Whole class Individual Pairwork Individual Group work Teacher Students Teacher – Ss Individual Teaching Date : Period 99 /04 /2013 Unit 15 : Computers Lesson : Read A / Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know computers work in a university B / Teaching aids : Posters , chart , pictures , cassette , cardboards C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I / Warm up : Jumbled words => Words relating to a computer - Put the cardboards on the board terpirn -> printer Team work seumo -> mouse recsnc -> screen nimorot -> monitor bdoaryke -> key board moseu dap -> mouse pad - Divide the class into teams and ask each team to go to the boars to write their answers as fast as possible II / Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and some new words to students Teacher 1, Pre-teach : - a Freshman = the first – year student at a college / university - a jack ( translation ) Teacher – Ss - a bulletin board = notice board - skeptical (adj ) ( translation ) - impact (nu ) ( translation ) + Get Ss to copy the vocabulary * Checking vocabulary : Rub out and remember Open prediction : Introduce the topic of the text - Ask Ss to guess what they are going to read * Suggestions : a) Where in the library we get / find information ? b) How can we store the information ? c) If we want to discuss something , how can we ? - Call on some Ss to give their predictions and write them on the board III / While - reading : Check the predictions : - Ask Ss to read the text to check if their guesses are correct or not - Give feedback and correct True / False Statements - Get Ss to read the text again then read the true / false statements and decide if the statements are true or false - Call on some ss to give their answers and correct the false statements - Have Ss copy all the right statements in their notebooks Answer Key : a) T b) T c) T d) F -> Students not have to go to computer rooms because college campuses now have computer jacks in every part of the university e) T f) T IV / Post-reading : Comprehension questions - Have Ss read the questions / 147 and find out the information in the text to answer - Ask Ss to compare their answers with their partners - Call on some Ss to give their answers for the class - Give feedback and correct Answer key : a) It has no library All the information normally found in a library is now stored in the university, s computers b) All the information normally found in a library or messages normally found on a bulletin board c) A computer and a telephone (line) d) With a bulletin board on the Internet , a great number of people (over 20 million) can get access to the bulletin and exchange information quickly - Have them copy V / Homework : Whole class Whole class Group of Ss Teacher – Ss Individual Whole class Pair work Individual Pair work Teacher Individual Learn by heart new words and write two line for each one Remember and complete Teaching Date : Period 100 /0 /2013 Unit 15 : Computers Lesson : write A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a set on instructions on how to use the printer and complete a flow chart and get Ss to practice in writing instructions B / Teaching aids : chart , pictures , C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I / Warm up : Word square - Put the word square chart on the board Group work of 4/5 - Inform the topic and the number of the hidden words students ( Words related to a computer ) - Ask Ss to write the words they find out on a piece of paper and hand in offer they finish their work C N E E R C S K O U T P U T P E M O N I T O R Y P A E N O C I B U H B C D E N O T R A Y O P T A E S U O M G E R R I P O W E R D - Give feedbcack and correct II / Pre-writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words to students Pre-teach : => Use the picture / 142 to elicit words from Ss - paper input tray - power button ( Picture ) - icon - output path - to remove = to put sth way Teacher – Ss Teacher Teacher – Ss + Have ss copy  Checking vocabulary : Matching - Ask Ss to look at exercise / 142 and the matching - Get some Ss to give their answers and correct Answer Key : a) b) c) d) e) ) Gap fill - Get Ss to make use of some phrasal verbs - Put the words on the board and ask Ss to fill in the gaps with right words if possible to wait so/sth to remove sth to turn a machine to plug sth to load sth - Ask some Ss to give their answers and correct Answer Key : a) b) c) d) e) f) Answer Key to wait for (so / sth ) to remove (sth) to turn on / off ( a machine ) to plug in sth to load ( sth ) III / While -writing : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures / 143 and read the cues - Have Ss work in pairs to outline the instructions - Call on some Ss to say out the instructions first ( or Ss for each sentence ) - Ask Ss to write the instructions in their note books IV / Post - writing : - Have some Ss read their writings before the class - Give feedback and correct Answer Key Plug in the printer and turn on the power Remove the old paper and load the new paper in the paper input tray Wait for power button to flash Have the pages appear on the computer screen Click the printer icon on the screen and wait for a few seconds The printed - paper will get out from the output path in a minute V / Homework : Learn by heart new word and write two line for each one Do the exercises in the workbook Prepare the next lesson Whole class Individual Teacher – Ss Pair work Teacher – Ss Pair work Individual Individual Whole class Remember and complete Teaching Date : Period 101 /0 /2013 Unit 15 : Computers Lesson : Language focus A / Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use “ yet “ and “ already “ to express the present perfect B / Teaching aids : chart C / Procedure Teacher’s activities I /Warm up : Students’ activities Lucky number ( Consolidation of Tenses ) - Write 10 numbers on the board ( to 10 ) Team work - Tell Ss each number is for a question but of them are lucky numbers IF Ss choose a lucky number , they not have to answer any question but they will get points and they can choose another number - Divide the class into teams Questions What does your father ? What did you last night ? Lucky number How often is Hue Festival held ? Lucky number What were you doing at o,clock last night ? Guess what your parents are doing at the moment ? Who often cooks in your family ? Which grade will you be in next school year ? 10 Lucky number  Lead in the new lesson II / Language focus 1 Presentation : a) Set the scene “ Ba, mother has just been back from market She wanted him to some housework while she was at the market Ba Teacher made notes in his diary and checked (v) the work he has done Look at Ba, diary “ - Show the chart ( Ba,s diary ) on the board + Do homework (v) -> ( already ) + Tidy the room (v) x ( not yet ) + Turn off the washing machine (v) -> ( already ) + Call and tell Aunt Le to have lunch (v) -> ( already ) - Ask questions and elicit the answers from Ss T : Has Ba done his homework yet ? S : Yes , he has already done his homework T : Has Ba tidied the room yet ? S : No, he has not tidied the room yet - Have Ss repeat and write the sentences on the board => Present perfect with Yet and already - Yet : used in questions and negative statements - Already : used in positive statements + Yet : at the end of the sentence + Already : between auxiliary have and past participle - Have Ss copy Practice : Gap fill Dialogue - Ask Ss to look at Ba,s diary and complete the dialogue using Yet and Already - Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue for the class - Give feedback and correct Production : Language focus Questions - Answers - Ask Ss to look at the flight information tables and ask questions to show the models T : Has the flight to Vientiane departed yet ? S : Yes , it has not arrived yet T : Has the flight from Los Angeles arrived yet ? S : No , it has not arrived yet - Have ss take in turns to ask and answer the questions - Call on some Ss to demonstrate the exchanges in front of the class - Give feedback and correct III / Language focus : Presentation : a) Pre teach : Set the scene :  Use Vietnamese to elicit the models : I have ever been to Da Lat -> ( finished ) My parents have gone to DaLat for days -> ( incomplete ) => Present perfect tense Use : - finished actions -> indefinite time - incomplete actions -> for , since , recently Form : Have / has + Past participle - Get Ss to copy Practice : Grammar Drill - Ask ss to look at the table / 146 , read the sentences and check (v) the correct column - Call on some Ss to give their answers - Give feedback and correct a) I have been to SaPa highlands Finished action v Incomplete action Teacher – Ss Whole class Whole class Pair work Teacher – Ss Teacher – Ss Pair work Teacher – Ss Whole class Individual b) They have lived in Ca Mau for v 10 years c) She has finished her homework v d) She has worked with the v computer since early morning e) We have found the troubles of the v printer f) Someone has unplugged the v printer g) People have received information v through the internet recently IV / Language focus Presentation : * Revision - Put the chart on the board and ask Ss to read the sentences - Ask Ss to decide which sentence is in the present perfect and which is past simple a) Her family moved to Hanoi years ago b) He has never met such an intelligent boy before c) My brother has become more independent sine he left home d) When did the Second world war break out ? - Call on Ss to give their answers - Give feedback and correct a) Past simple -> Finished action with definite time b) Present perfect -> an action ( not ) taking place from the past to the present c) Has become : Present perfect -> ( same as b) Left : Past simple -> finished action with understood defitine time d) Past simple -> ( same as a) Practice : Grammar Drill - Ask Ss to complete the dialogues orally - Call on some pairs to give their answers - Give feedback and correct - Have some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues for the class * Answer key : Ba : Have you seen the film Jurassic Park yet ? Nam : Yes , I have Ba : When did you see it ? Nam : I saw it three months ago Loan : We have not had a vacation since last year Chi : why not ? Loan : My parents have been very busy since then Nga : Have you heard the news about Nam ? Mai : No What happened ? Nga : He had an accident He was jogging He suddenly fell and broke his leg Sung : Have the plane arrived yet ? Clerk : Yes , it has Pair work Individual Teacher Pair work Teacher – Ss Individual Sung : When did it arrive ? Clerk : It arrived at the airport two hours ago Production : Writing - Ask Ss to write sentences of their own in the past simple and Group of 4/5 Ss in the present perfect - Have some of them write their sentences on the board for public check and give them points if possible V / Homework : Learn by hear all the structures and make some sentences with Teacher – Ss them Do the exercises in the work book Remember and Prepare the next lesson complete Teaching Date : Period 102 /0 /2013 REVISION I Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use grammar and vocabulary - Language contents: + Structures: - Present perfect with yet and already - Comparison the present perfect with past simple + Vocabulary: (review) II Teaching aids: - Extra exercises III Procedure: Teacher’s and students’activities 1) Warm up: * Network Groupwork -T divides the class into two groups -SS go to C.B to write.(one student-one form) Contents Structures Teaching Date : /0 /2013 Period 103 REVISION (Cont.) I Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise some main structures and vocabulary that they have learned - Language contents: + Structures: - + Vocabulary: (review) II Teaching aids: - Workbook, extra exercises III Procedure: Teacher’s and students’activities 1) Warm up: * Kim’s game -T puts a poster (Structures) on the board -SS look at the poster and try to remember -T covers the poster -SS go to the board to write -T corrects 2) Presentation: * Review old structures: - T get ss to repeat the structures that they have learned 3) Practice: - Let ss some exercises in order to further practice these structures: -SS work in groups to fill in the gaps -SS go to the board to write -T corrects Contents - Groupwork Ex1: Choose the correct words or phrases to fill in the blanks (change the form if necessary): in (2) fix carry cross be While go water on regular 1.Can you tell me where she _ ? 2.He had his brother his watch 3.I take part most youth activities of my school 4.Jane saw her old friend while she the street 5.I saw him _ the flowers in the garden 6.How about _ to Thai Binh market ? 7.My mother is very keen Teaching Date : /0 /2013 Period 104 REVISION (Cont.) I Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to some exercises in order to revise the main structures and vocabulary that they have learned - Language contents: + Structures: - passive, reported speech, verb forms + Vocabulary: (review) II Teaching aids: - Extra exercises III Procedure: Teacher’s and students’activities Warm up: - Let ss tell about the structures they have already revised in the previous period Presentation: - T retell some old structures and words Practice: - Ask ss to some exercises in order to master the structures -SS the exercise in groups -SS go to the board to write -T gives feedback Contents Teacher and students - Passive forms - Reported speech - Compound words - Tenses of verbs - Ex 1: Choose one word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others Identify your answer by circling the corresponding letter A, B, C, or D 1, A lava B valley C gallery D carol 2, A prison B carol C competition D royal 3, A.twin B religious C festival D competition 4, A festival B over C fetch D yell Ex 2: Choose from the four options given (mark A, B, C, or D ) one best answer to complete each sentence by circling the corresponding letter A, B, C, or D: She has just the letter A.write B to write C writing D written Lan is studying hard pass the final exam A for B in order to C so D such as It is too cold outside Would you mind the window? A to close B close C closed D closing -SS write individually -SS compare with their partners -SS go to the board to write -T corrects -T gets SS to pronounce the words -T reads the words -SS listen Would you like to the movies tonight? A to come B come C coming D came I’m happy all the exams A passing B to pass C pass D passed The bicycle in Japan is $ 100 A make B made C making D to make We dinner when the phone rang A are having B had C have had D were having He said that he for a car company A worked B works C is working D has worked Nhi asked Nga if My Son in Quang Nam province A was B has been C is D will be 10 This letter by Phuong A writes B wrote C was written D writing 11 Who invented the telephone? A Graham Bell B Igo Sikorsky C Alexander BainD Thomas Edison 12 His father said that he repair his bike A can B could C may D has to Ex 2: Write the questions to complete the the dialogue: Lan: Hello My name is Lan (1) ? Tom: Hi My name is Tom Lan: (2) ? Tom: I come from Australia Lan: (3) ? Tom: I’m studying Vietnamese Lan: (4) ? Tom: I have leartnt it since last summer Ex3: Read the passage and fill in each gap with one word from the box: Until branches festival rain Which singing similar made Harvest Home is a (1)…… English harvest festival The last day of harvest is celebrated by (2)……., shouting and decorating the village with tree (3)…… The cailleac, or last sheaf of corn, (4) … represents the spirit of the field, is (5).… into a harvest doll and drenched with (6) …… It is believed that will bring (7) … for the next harvest The sheaf is saved (8)… spring planting In ancient time , the (9)…… also included they symbolic murder of the grain 4) Production: spirit, as well as rites for getting rid of the - T have ss to repeat the structures devil A (10) … festival was tradictionally they have just revised held in parts of Ireland , Scotland, and Northern ) Homework : Europe -Learn these structures and words Answers: -Prepare for the final written test Ex1: 1- A 2- D 3- C 4- B next period Ex2: 1-D 2-B 3- D 4- A 5- B 6- B 9- A 10- C Ex3: 1, traditional 2, singing 3, branches 4, which 5, made The second term examination Period: 105 Teaching Date : 20/04 /2013 Period 96 Unit 15 : Computers 7- D 8- A 11-A 12-B 6, water 7, rain 8, until 9, festival 10, similar Lesson 2: Speak + Listen A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use some common useful expressions to express agreement and disagrement Listen for details B / Teaching aids : Posters , chart , pictures C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I / Warm up : Guessing game : “ Do you think that ? “ - Ask Ss each to think one of the ways comptuers are helpful and write it on a pice of paper Individual - Call on a stude4nt to the front of the class - Get the rest of the class ask him/ her “ Do you think that computer are ? - The student can only answer with yes or no - Tell Ss the one to have the right guess will get one good mark and go on answering the classmates / questions II / Pre-speaking: Introduce the topic of the speaking and structures to students Teacher Brainstorm : - Write the topic on the board : Useful expressions to express Teacher – Ss agreements and disagreements - Put the table on the board and elicit students, answers then write them on the table Opinion Agreement I like I don,t like I think I feel I not believe So I I agree You are right Neither I Degree of Agreement I agree , but Yes , but on the other hand Disagreement I disagree I can not agree with you No , I think - Explain the phrase “ on the other hand “ to Ss - Get Ss to copy the table Matching : - Put the pictures / 139 on the right of the board and the word cues on the left ( not in order ) - Have Ss match the words with the pictures Reading comic books d Playing in the rain a Driving a car b Whole class Individual Foreign food c - Call on some Ss to go to the board to draw the matching lines => Answer key : b c a d III / While - speaking : - Erase the words but leave the pictures * Oral Drill - Get a student to demonstrate the model (a) T : I think driving a car is easy Ss : I disagree I think it is difficult to drive a car or So I - Ask Ss to use the adjectives in the box on page 140 to express their opinions after going through the meaning of some new words entertaining time - consuming challenging * Suggestions : - easy once we get used to it - Challenging difficult to get used to driving in traffic - Dangerous b Comic - boring Reading comic books - interesting / fun - time – consuming c Foreign food - delicious Humbergers , pizza , fun to eat French fries - unhealthy d Playing in the rain - fun - interesting - entertaining - Have Ss use the pictures on the board to practice speaking with their partners - Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class - Give feedback and correct Teacher – Ss Pair work a Driving a car Learning to drive a car IV / Post-speaking : Mapped dialogue - Present the dialogue and have Ss repeat , sentence by sentence - Call on one student to demonstrate the dialogue + Open pair + Closed pairs : Ss make similar dialogues refering the cues / 140 to replace the information V / Pre-listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words to students * Pre-teach : - Put the flow chart on the board and have Ss copy it into their Teacher Teacher – Ss Pair work Teacher Teacher – Ss exercises books - Get Ss to understand how events are sequenced in a flow chart and the meanings of all the shapes used in the chart Starting / stopping (Circle ) Questions ( Triangle ) Answers Individual ( Oval ) VI / While -listening : Gap fill - Ask Ss to look at the flow chart and guess the words in the gaps - Play the tape times and ask ss to listen - Tell Ss to fill the gaps with the information they have heard from the tape - Have ss compare the answers with their partners - Call on some Ss to go to the board to write their answers - Give feedback and correct Pairwork Answer key : Find a machine d) Take it a) Do you have the correct change ? Insert coins and press button b) Yes c) What you want to drink ? Lemon Soda - Have Ss copy VII / Post -Listening : Write - it - up - Have Ss write a set of instructions on how to get a drink from a machine , using the flow chart - Call on some Ss to read their writing for the class Individual VIII /Homework : Write complete dialogues in your notebooks Do the exercises in the owrkbook Prepare the next lesson Individual Remember and complete Preparing: 18/4/2010 Teaching: 19/4/2010 Period 96 Unit 16 : inventions Lesson 1: Getting started Listen and read A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know the origin of paper and talk about the process of producing something Practice reading for details about the development of paper and how to produce chocolate B / Teaching aids : Posters , cassette , realia , chart , pictures , grid chart C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I / Warm up : Quiz – Who did it ? - Divide the class into teams Teamwork - Tell Ss the team raising theirt hands first will have the right to answer the question - Inform the questions “ Who was the inventor of ? or “ Who invented .?  Suggestions : Steam engine -> Thomas Savery built the first steam engine in 1698 and later Watt improved it Light bulb - > HumphryDavy , an English scientist , in 1800 Sewing machine -> Issac Meritt Singer ( 1850 ) Aqualung -> Jacques – Yves Cousteau in 1943 Telephone -> A Graham Bell  Lead into the new lesson Teacher II / Pre- reading : Introduce the topic of the passage reading and Teacher some new words to Ss Pre- teach Vocabulary : - to remove use a flowchart and Vietnamese to Teacher –Ss - to crush elicit words - to liquefy 1-> 2-> 3-> - to grind - to manufacture = to produce - a process – manufacturing process - a mold ( realia / picture ) - conveyor belt ( picture ) + Have Ss copy in their note books Whole class  Checking vocabulary : Slap the board Open predictions : - Set the scene “ Tim jones , Hoa,s American pen pal , is visiting a chocolate factory with his class and his teaher Mrs Allen Now , guess who will show them around the factory and what they will learn from the visit ? - Ask ss to work in groups to predict - Collect their predictions and write them on the board III / While- reading : Checking the their predictions - Play the tape and ask Ss to listen while reading the dialogue ( times ) - Have them correct their predictions and give feedback Matching : - Ask ss to match the half sentences - Play the tape again ( times ) and have Ss compare their answer with their pictures - Call on Ss to give their answers for the class - Give feedback and correct Answer Key : E a) The beans are cleaned before being cooked D b) Mr Roberts thought Tim and Sam were going to touch the button C c) After cooking , the cooa bean smell like chocolate F d) Sugar is one of the ingredients in chocolate B e ) Mrs Allen warned Sam to leave some chocolate for others A f) A sample of chocolate is given after visitors have toured the factory => Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of class - Correct mistakes if any - Get ss to write the full sentences in their exercise notebooks IV / Post - reading : Grid : - Put the grid on the board and have Ss copy - Ask ss to read the dialogue again and fill in the grid Teacher Groupwork Teacher Teacher Whole class Whole class Pair work chocolate manufacturing process Answer Key : The beans are washed , weighed and cooked The shells are removed The beans are crushed and liquefied Cocoa butter , sugar , vanilla and milk are added The mixture is ground , rolled and pound into the molds - Call on some pairs to go the board to write their answers - Give feedback and correct Rewrite the grid using sequence markers ( First , next , then , finally ) V/ Homework : Teacher –Ss Individual Learn by hear new words and write two line for each one Copy the write in their notebooks Do the exercises in the workbook Prepare the next lesson Whole class Remember and complete Preparing: 20/4/2010 Teaching: 21/4/2010 Period 97 Unit 16 (cont) Lesson : speak + Listen A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about the inventions using the passive Listening about paper making B / Teaching aids : tables C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I/ Warm up : Bingo - Get Ss to brainstorm a list of 10 words and write them on the Individual board foreman process , manufacture , remove , crush , liquefy , grind , pour , mold , conveyor belt - Ask ss to choose any words and copy them into their paper - Call out the words until someone has ticked all of his / her words and shouts “ Bingo “ II / Pre- speaking : Introduce the topic of the speaking and some Teacher new words to students Pre-teach Vocabulary : - Have ss study the meanings of the inventions using Vietnamese Teacher –Ss Facsimile Reinforced concrete Microphone Loudspeaker Helicopter * Checking vocabulary : Which words Grammar Awareness Whole class - Ask ss to read the dialogue / 148 again and pick out all of the passive sentences Pairwork - Call on Ss to give their answer - Have ss review the passive in the present and past simple tenses Answer Key : This is where the cocoa beans are stored ( present simple ) That button can not be touched ( passive with model ) The beans are washed , weighed and cooked here Individual After the shells are removed into molds III / While- Speaking : Practice : Word- Cue Drill - Have Ss read the model dialogue on 149 - Let Ss know what they are going to : Ask and answer questions about the inventions to fill in the missing information - Ask ss to look at the tables on 150 and 156 and model the exchanges , using a good student - Have Ss work in pairs , one looks at the table / 150 and the other / 156 - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions orally then fill in the missing information - Go around and assist Ss if necessary - Call on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges - Give feedback and correct - Have Ss copy the complete table Invention Printing Press Bicycle Facsimile Sewing machine Reinforced concrete Microphone X-ray Loudspeaker Helicopter Color TV Date 1810 1816 1843 1845 1849 Inventor Friedrich Koenig Karl D Sanerbronn Alexander Bain Elias Howe F.J Monier Nationality German German English American French 1878 1895 1924 1939 1950 D.E Hughes American Wilhel Konarad German C.W.Rice American Igor Sikorsky American Peter Carl Gold American mark Optical fiber 1955 Narinder Kapany German Laser 1958 Gordon Gould American IV / Post - speaking : Making reports - Model and have Ss repeat Example : The Printing Press was invented by Friedrich Koenig in 1810 - Ask Ss to use the complete table to report what they have found V / Pre-listening : Introduce the topic of the listening and some new words to students Pre-teach vocabulary : - Procedure (n) ( Translation ) - Pulp (nu) -> What is used to make paper ? - Vat (n) ( picture / drawing ) - to drain = to make something empty or dry by removing all the liquid from it ) - Roller (n) ( picture ) - Roll (n) ( realia ) => Have Ss copy VI / While -listening : Gap fill ( Listen ) Whole class Teacher – Ss Teacher – Ss Pair work Teacher – Ss Pair work Teacher –Ss Individual Teacher – ss - Inform the topic : Paper – making process Have Ss read the sentences Play the tape or times and ask ss to fill in the gaps with the words they catch Ask ss to compare their answers with their partners Call on Ss to give their answers Answer Key : simple same two hundred left rollers - Call on some Ss to read the complete sentences in front of class VII / Post - reading : Ordering Prediction ( Listen ) - Ask ss to read the sentences (a-> g ) carefully and guess the order - Ask Ss to work in groups to predictions - Collect their predictions and write their predictions on the board - Play the tape again and ask Ss to listen - Call on Ss to give their correction - Give feedback and correct : Answer key : c Paper pulp was placed in the vat d Paper pulp was mixed with water a The water was drained e The pulp fibers were poured out g The pulp was conveyed under the rollers f The fibers were smoothed and pressed dry b The paper was put on a roll => Call on some Ss to read the complete sentences aloud - Get them to copy their notebooks VIII/ Homework : Learn by heart new words and write two lines for each one Use the information in the table to write 12 sentences in the notebooks Prepare the next lesson Whole class Teacher Whole class Individual Pairwork Individual Group work Teacher Students Teacher – Ss Individual Preparing: 25/4/2010 Teaching: 26/4/2010 Period 98 Unit 16 (cont) Lesson : Read A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to fill in the gaps and order sentences from listening about paper making B / Teaching aids : cassette , , chart , pictures C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I / Warm up and pre-teach : Brainstorming Teacher – Ss Microwave Household Appliances ( May be write the names of the things in Vietnamese )  Remark and introduce some new words in English : - Microwave (n) : vi sãng - Vacuum (n) : m¸y hut bôi - Toaster (n) :m¸y níng b¸nh m× - Have Ss copy * Checking vocabulary : Bingo - Get Ss to brainstorm a list of 10 new words and write them on the board - Have Ss choose any 4/5 words and copy them into their paper Call out the words until someone has ticked all of their words and shout “ Bingo “ and wins ( microwave , vacuum , hairdryer , dishwasher , telephone , toaster , washing machine , ) II/ While- reading : Matching - Get Ss to read the poem / 151 - Ask some questions to help them understand the reading more + What is the first verse about ? + Is the second verse about the appliances used in the kitchen ? + What are “ doom , chugga-chug , vroom , boom ? - Have Ss match the headings to the verses / 152 - Call on Ss to give their answers - Give feedback and correct Answer key : Verse : b Appliances that cooked food Verse : c Appliances that clean or dry things Verse 3: a Instrument invented by Alexander Graham Bell - Get Ss to copy in their notebooks III/ Post - reading : Gap fill - Tell Ss to read the sentences carefully and fill the gaps with the inventions taken from the poems - Have ss compare their answers with their partners - Call on ss to give their answer and correct Answer key : Vacuum Telephone Washing machine Microwave Hair dryer Toaster - Call on some ss to read the complete sentences aloud - Have Ss copy their notebooks IV / Homework : Learn by heart all the things they have learnt and copy in their Whole class Individual Individual Pair work Teacher – Ss Pairwork Teacher – Ss notebooks Do the exercises in the workbook Prepare the next lesson Period 99 Remember and complete Lesson : Write A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the sequence markers to describe a manufacturing procedure B / Teaching aids : cassette , pictures , cardboards C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I / Warm up : Jumbled words Groupwork of 4/5 Ss - Put the cardboards with jumbles words on the board - Inform the topic : words related to papermaking procedure : lppu = pulp llreor = roller moreer = remove darni = drain berif ver = fibre - Ask each group to write their answer on a piece of paper to hand in Teacher => Lead in the new lesson II / Pre - writing : Introduce the topic of the writing and some new words to students Teacher – ss Pre-teach vocabulary : - a log ( n) : a thick piece of wood that is cut from a tree - to flatten = to make sth become flat - to refine = läc , lµm tinh khiÕt Whole class - chemically ( adv ) = treated in a chemical process Whole class => Have Ss copy * Checking vocabulary : What and where Gap fill : Whole class - Ask ss to read the text / 152 and fill in the gaps with the right sequence markers to describe the procedure of paper - making - Ask Ss some question to check if they understand the text + What is cut into chips ? + What are chips mixed with before they are crushed to heavy pulp ? + Why is the pulp passed through rollers ? Teacher – ss + What is the last step in paper – making ? - Call on some ss to read the completed sentences Give feedback and correct Answer Key : First Then Next After this Then Finally Ordering Pictures - Have Ss look at the pictures / 153 - Ask ss to think of the process of chocolate – making and put the pictures in the correct order - Call on some pairs to give their answers - Ask Ss to listen to check if their answers are correct or not - Read the statements aloud 1.d The fruit harvest is fermented for to days to kill the beans and turn them brown a The beans are dried in the sun e The beans are cleared in special machines c The beans are roasted to bring out the chocolate flavor b They are shelled and ground to produce chocolate liquor f The liquor is made into chocolate candy or cocoa powder - Give feedback and correct Answer Key : -2 - -1- 5- III / While - writing : - Ask Ss to rearrange the sentences / 153 according to the ordered pictures - Call on Ss to give their answer Answer key : 1.d a e c b f - Have Ss use the sequence makers to link the sentences together in a paragraph - Go around and help Ss if necessary - Call on some Ss to read their writing for the class - Give feedback and correct => Have Ss copy - Call on some Ss to read the complete sentences aloud IV / Post- writing : Write from the following sets of words and phrases , complete which together describe the process of making Ice - cream You can make all the necessary changes and additions a) First / basic ingredients / be pored / tank b) Then / be mixed / thorough ( hoµn toµn , kÜ lìng ) c) Next / mixture / be cooled and piped / freezing tank d) Then / be beaten until smooth / and nuts or fruits / added e) After this / be packed / containers f) Finally / be kept / refrigerated room until / hard - Ask ss to work in groups - Collect their writings to show in front of class - Correct mistakes and ask them to copy in their notebooks V / Homework : Learn by heart all new words and copy in their notebooks Rewrite their writings in their notebooks Prepare the next lesson Period 100 Lesson : Language focus Pair work Teacher – Ss Teacher Teacher – ss Individual TEacher – Ss Individual Teacher – Ss Whole class Group work Teacher Teacher – ss Whole class Remember and complete A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to change active sentences into passive ones and write WH – questions in the passive B / Teaching aids : Cardboards C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I / Warm up : Pelmanism - Inform the topic : Infinitive - Past participle - Didive the class into teams Team work Infinitive Past participle Write Written Draw Drawn Sell Sold Win Won Run Run II / Language focus : Presentation : * Pre teach vocabulary : - to run a business / company = to be in charge of something - around the corner = very near - due to =because of - flood (n) Ex: There might be flood when it rains heavily for days - Zipper ( Realia ) - Xerograph ( translation ) + Have Ss copy Teacher – Ss Whole class  Checking vocabulary : Slap the board Whole class Run a business Xerograph Around the corner Flood Due to Zipper Teacher – Ss - Have Ss review how to change an active sentences into a passive one Practice : 2.1 Language focus : - Have Ss exercise / 154 - Call on some Ss to give their answers orally for the class - Get some Ss to go to the board and write the sentences - Give feedback and correct Pair work Answer Key : a) The document was typed by Mrs Quyen b) The computer was repaired by Mr Nhan c) The picture was drawn by Ba d) The lights were turned off by Hoa e) The cake was baked by Lan 2.2 Language focus : - Have Ss exercise - Ask Ss to compare their answers - Call on some ss to give their answers orally then ask them to go to the board and write the sentences - Give feedback and correct Answer Key : a) was awarded b) won c) ran d) was run / was sold e) was closed or closed 2.3 Language focus : - Have Ss exercise - Go through the underlined words with Ss before have them write questions Eg : a) The zipper -> What b) Maize -> What in the 16th century -> When c) by Lewis Waterman -> Who d) in Hungry -> where e) in coping machines -> in which machine - Have some ss to give their answers in front of the class - Give feedback and correct `Answer Key : a) What was invented by W.L Judson in 1893 ? b) What was brought into Vietnam by Phung Khac Khoan ? When was maize brought into Vietnam ? c) Who invented the fountain pen ? When was the fountain pen invented ? d) Where was the ballpoint pen invented ? e) In which machine is xerography widely used ? 2.4 Language focus : - Ask Ss to use the pictures and the word cues to write a description of how white rice is produced in the traditional way , using the sequence markers - Have Ss complete the sentences orally first - Ask Ss to write the paragraph in their exercise notebook - Monitor while Ss are writing and help them if necessary - Call on some Ss to read their writing - Give feedback and correct First , the rice crop is harvested , Then the rice plants are Individual Pairwork Teacher – Ss Individual Teacher – Ss Teacher – ss Individual Teacher – Ss threshed Next ( After this ) , the rice grains are husked in the mill to produce brown rice After this , the bran is removed in the mortar and it is finally winnowed to produce white rice III / Homework : Change the sentences in language focus into the active Ex : W.L Judson invented the zipper in 1893 Redo the exercises ( 1,2,4 ) in their notebooks Prepare the next lesson Remember and complete Preparing: 4/5/2009 Teaching: 5/4/2009 consolidation Period 101, 102,103 A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to summarize the basic knowledge they have learnt in the second semester B / Teaching aids : Cardboards , posters C / Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities =.> Introduce the contents of the lesson to students Teacher I / Grammar : 1/ Câu bị động Câu bị động đợc sử dụng nhằm để nhấn mạnh vào hành động tân ngữ không nhấn mạnh vào hành động chủ ngữ câu chủ động be + P2 Phơng pháp chuyển đổi từ câu chủ động sang câu bị động - Đa tân ngữ câu chủ động lên làm chủ ngữ Trong trờng hợp nÕu cã t©n ng÷ ( trùc tiÕp, gi¸n tiÕp), muèn nhÊn m¹nh vµo t©n ng÷ nµo th× ngêi ta ®a nã lªn lµm chñ ng÷ ( nhng thßng lµ t©n ng÷ gi¸n tiÕp lµm chñ ng÷) VÝ dô: I gave him a book hay I gave a book to him Trong c©u nµy book lµ t©n ng÷ trùc tiÕp, him lµ t©n ng÷ gi¸n tiÕp, ta đổi: He was given a book by me - Thời động từ câu bị động phải tuân theo thời động từ câu chủ động - Đặt by + tân ngữ đằng sau tất các tân ngữ khác - to be made, to be made of đợc làm - vật đợc làm b»ng thø nguyªn vËt liÖu This table is made of wood - to be made from: đợc làm - vật đợc làm thứ nguyªn vËt liÖu trë lªn - to be made out of: đợc làm ( dùng cho thực phẩm) This cake is made out of flour, egg, butter and sugar - Mọi biến đổi thời và thể nhằm vào động từ to be, còn Teacher – Ss Whole class Teacher Teacher – Ss Whole class ph©n tõ gi÷ nguyªn (xem c¸c c«ng thøc díi ®©y.) Simple present hay simple past am is are + [verb in past participle] was were Chủ động : Hurricanes destroy a great deal of property each year Subject present complement Teacher Teacher – Ss Bị động : A great deal of property is destroyed by hurricanes each year singular subject be past participle Whole class Chủ động : The tornado destroyed thirty houses Subject past complement Bi động : Thirty houses were destroyed by the tornado plural subject participle be past present progressive hay Past progressive am is are + being + [verb in past participle] was were Chủ động : The committee is considering several new proposals Subject present progressive Teacher complement Bị động : Several new proposals are being considered by the Teacher – Ss committee plural subject auxiliary be past participle Chủ động : The committee was considering several new proposals Subject past progressive complement Whole class Bị động : Several new proposals were being considered by the committee auxiliary be plural subject past participle present perfect hay Past perfect has have had + been + [verb in past participle] Chủ động: The company has ordered some new equipment subject present perfect complement Bị động : Some new equipment has been ordered by the company Singular subject auxiliary be past participle Chủ động : The company had ordered some new equipment before the strike began Teacher subject past perfect complement Bị động : Some new equipment had been ordered by the company before the strike began be past participle Singular subject auxiliary §éng tõ khiÕm khuyÕt (modal) Teacher – Ss modal + be + [ verb in past participle] Chủ động : The manager should sign these contracts today Subject modal + verb complement Whole class Bị động : These contracts should be signed by the manager today Subject modal be past participle modal + perfect modal + have + been + [ verb in past participle] Chủ động: Somebody should have called the president this morning Teacher Subject modal + perfect complement Bị động : The president should have been called this morning 2/ MÖnh lÖnh thøc trùc tiÕp MÖnh lÖnh thøc trùc tiÕp lµ c©u mµ mét ng êi lÖnh cho mét ngêi khác làm việc gì đó Nó có thể có please trớc Chủ ngữ đợc hiểu là you Sử dụng dạng đơn giản động từ (Nguyên thể bỏ to) Teacher – Ss EX: Close the door Open the window Leave the room Pay your rent Please turn off the light Be quiet Dạng mệnh lệnh thức phủ định đợc thành lập nhờ cộng thêm Whole class don’t trớc động từ Don’t close the door Please don’t turn off the light Don’t open the window, please MÖnh lÖnh thøc gi¸n tiÕp Thờng dùng với động từ sau: to order to ask sb to sth to tell ( not to sth ) to say ex: John told Mary to close the door Jack asked Jill to turn off the light The teacher told Christopher to open the window Please tell Jaime to leave the room John ordered Bill to close his book The policeman ordered the suspect to be quiet Lu ý: §u«i cña Let’s , shall we Ex: Let’s go out for lunch, shall we? Teacher Kh¸c víi let us c©u mÖnh lÖnh thøc VÝ dô: Let’s go now (chóng ta ®i th«i) kh¸c víi Let us go, please ( xin hãy chúng tôi đi) II / Exercises : - Ask ss to the exercises : The exercises in the workbook : Ex 1/96 Ex / 96 Ex / 94 Practical Workbook : Ex II / 189 - Call on some Ss to to go the board to write them - Correct and give feedback III/ Homework : Redo the exercises in their notebooks Ask ss to review to prepare the test Teacher – Ss Whole class Teacher Teacher – Ss Whole class Individual Whole class Period 104 The second semester test A/ Aims and objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to the test well B / Teaching aids : Paper teat C / Procedure : - Deliver the paper test to Students - Observe the class and draw the paper test I / Fill in each gap with one word or phrase given in brackets to complete each sentence : ( 2,5 ps ) She has not finished the letter ( already , just , yet , never ) The boy is not to lift the suitcase ( enough strong , strong enough , too strong , so strong ) Lan is studying hard pass the final exam ( for , in order to , so to , as to ) It is too cold outside Would you mind the window ? ( to close , close , closing , closed ) Would you like to go to the movies tonight ? - Sorry , I can not I my homework this evening ( am doing , , will , doing ) I am happy all the exams ( passing , to pass , pass , passed ) The teacher .to the headmaster is in charge of my class ( talks , is talking , talking , to talk ) The bike in Japan is US$ 100 ( making , made , is making , to make ) We dinner when the phone rang ( are having , had , have had , were having ) 10 He said ( that ) he for a car company ( worked , works , is working , has worked ) II / Complete the questions of the conversation : ( 2,5 ps ) Hoa : Hello My name is Hoa What is your name ? Tom : Hi My name is Tom Hoa : (1) ? Tom : I come from Australia Hoa : (2) .? Tom : I am studying Vietnamese Hoa : ( 3) ? Tom : I have learnt it since last summer Hoa : (4 ) ? Tom : I am having my final exams in June next year Hoa : (5) ? Tom : Going to the movies tonight ? I am afraid I can not I am doing my homework Hoa: Another time perhaps Good luck to you , Tom Tom : Thanks a lot , Hoa III / Read the passage Then answer the questions below : ( 3, ps ) Ha long – Bay of the Descending Dragon – is popular with both Vietnamese and international tourists One of the attractions of Ha Long is the Bay,s calm water with limestone mountains The Bay,s water is clear during the spring and early summer Upon arriving in Ha Long City , visitors can go along Chay Beach From the beach , they can hire a boat and go out to the Bay It is here that the visitors can find some of Southeast Asia,s most beautiful sites Dau Go Cave is one of the most beautiful caves at Ha Long It was the cave in which General Tran Hung Dao hid wooden stakes to beat the Mongols on Bach Dang River in 1288 Who is Ha Long popular with ? What is one of the attractions of Ha Long ? What is the Bay , s water like ? What can visitors when they arrive in Ha Long City ? Which is one of the most beautiful caves at Ha Long ? Where did General Tran Hung Dao hide wooden stakes to beat the Mongols on Bach Dang River in 1288 ? IV / Listen You are going to listen to LiLy talking about herself You are going to listen twice Check ( v) the correct box for True or False ( 2,0 ps ) Num Statements English is important to her as she will need it for her future job LiLy comes from China She started learning English when she was eighteen She had a problem with listening She can understand people when they speak fast She does not find English difficult to learn She wants to be an English teacher She loves English songs , but she does not hope to become a singer Answer Key : True False I / 2,5 ps : each right sentence is 0,25 ps yet strong enough in order to closing am doing to pass talking made were having 10 worked II / 2,5 ps : each correct sentence is 0,5 ps Where you come from ? What are you doing in Vietnam ? / What are you learning in Vietnam ? How long have learnt it ? When are you having your final exams ? Would you like to go the movies tonight ? III / 3,0 ps : each correct sentence is 0,5 ps Ha long is popular with both Vietnamese and international tourists One of the attractions of Ha Long is the bay,s calm water with limestone mountains The Bay,s water is clear during the spring and early summer They can go along Chay Beach , from the beach , they can hire a boat and go out to the Bay They can find some of Southeast Asia,s most beautiful sites One of the most beautiful caves at long is Dau Go General Tran Hung Dao hid wooden stakes in Dau Go cave to beat the Mongols on Bach Dang River in 1288 IV / 2,0 ps : each correct sentence is 0,25 T T F T T F T F Tape script : Hi ! My name is Lily I come from China I am a student , a university student I am eighteen years old I am studying English as a foreign language English is important to me because I will need it for my job in the future I began learning English when I was very young – at the age of eight I think that my biggest problem is listening People speak very quickly , so I can not understand them English is really hard for me to learn , but I like it I want to be an English teacher ; or I hope to become a singer one day because I love English songs very much The End Period 105 Ch÷a bµi kiÓm tra I Objective: By the end of the lesson SS will be able to undersand exam and can using all grammar easy II Procedure: T SS Warm-up: T call some ss on the board repeat old - repeat lesson and write exercise Pre – exam: T call some ss on the board made exercise - Listen 1.2.4 T call some is nhËn xÐt and so s¸nh bµi lµm While – exam: T gi¶i thÝch c¸ch lµm vµ híng dÉn c¸c Listen em lÇn sau lµm bµi cho tèt T give right answer Homework: T ark ss at home learn and exercise - Write - listen